JP2021183009A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a pseudo movable body display.SOLUTION: Storage means can store display position displacement information for displaying a display position in a display area of at least a partial specific image from a first position to a second position differing from the first position, image processing means can generate a displacement specific image obtained by displacing a specific image disposed in a specific display layer on the basis of image data on the basis of display position displacement information, and performance execution means can execute a specific performance for displaying a displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in a display area during variation display, and a display image of game-related information is disposed in a special display layer in which a disposed image is displayed in a display area more preferentially than the specific display layer.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-11

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, it is possible to perform an effect using a movable body that can be operated.

In this type of gaming machine, for example, by moving and displaying a pseudo-movable body display, it is possible to perform an effect similar to the effect of moving a movable body as a structure (for example, Patent Document). 1).

JP-A-2019-92949

Like the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the pseudo-movable body is only moved and displayed in the same manner as the movable body, and the interest of the production cannot be enhanced.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of pseudo-movable body display.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position,
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position,
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
A pseudo-movable body display effect for moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and
A movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, and
Is feasible and
When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed.
Moreover,
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIG. 12-5) on which an image based on the image data can be arranged. An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 12-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 12-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be noticed that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are executed. Furthermore, since a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect. Compared with the case where the image data of these displacement specific images is stored exclusively, the specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the following gaming machine (1). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, an image displayed on an image display device (display means) is broken at a specific timing such as during a reach effect during variable display as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-141396. There are some that can perform a scatter effect (specific effect).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the effect is simply that the image is broken and scattered, the effect is improved by executing the effect in a state where another image is displayed on the image display device. However, in this case, it is necessary to create dedicated image data for each image displayed on the image display device in order to execute the effect, and the amount of data to be stored in the storage means is excessive. There is a risk that it will grow in size.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the amount of data stored in a storage means in order to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine described in means (1) is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIG. 12-5) on which an image based on the image data can be arranged. An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 12-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 12-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data as compared with the case where the image data of these displacement specific images is stored exclusively. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the variable display of 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of a loss with a time saving. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view which shows the pachinko gaming machine as a feature part 241SG. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine as a feature part 241SG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. (A) and (B) are explanatory views showing the relationship between the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution period of various productions in a normal reach and a super reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the content and composition of various productions in super reach. It is a figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree by the execution state of development production A and development production B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the development flow of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing the movement mode of the mounted movable body, and (B) is a diagram for explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted. (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the first pseudo-movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body. (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the second pseudo-movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body. (A) is a diagram showing a movable range of the mounted movable body, (B) is a diagram showing a moving display area of the first pseudo-movable body display, and (C) is a diagram showing a moving display area of the second pseudo-movable body display. (A) is a figure which shows the specific movement display area of the 1st pseudo-movable body display, and (B) is the figure which shows the specific movement display area of the 2nd pseudo-movable body display. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice production type determination processing. (A) is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advance notice effect A, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advance notice effect B. (A) is a flowchart showing a development effect A type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a development effect A type determination table. (A) is a flowchart showing a development suggestion effect type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a development suggestion effect type determination table. (A) is a flowchart showing a development effect B type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a development effect B type determination table. (A) is a flowchart showing a determination effect type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination effect type determination table. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of directing operation mainly in normal reach of super reach β. (A) to (J) are diagrams mainly showing an example of a directing operation in a weak super reach. (A) to (F) are also diagrams showing an example of a directing operation in a weak super reach. (A) to (D) are diagrams mainly showing an example of a directing operation in a strong super reach. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing an example of a production operation of a strong super reach effect. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation after a big hit confirmation notification. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the details of the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the light emission display part and the mounted movable body LED. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation of the advance notice effect B in the super reach γ. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation of the advance notice effect B in the super reach γ. It is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. Similarly, it is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. Similarly, it is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. Similarly, it is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. Similarly, it is explanatory drawing for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. It is explanatory drawing for comparing the 1st pseudo movable body display and the 2nd pseudo movable body display. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the modification 1 of the feature portion 241SG. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing the second modification of the feature portion 241SG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the modification 3 of the feature portion 241SG. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example in an effect control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a layer. It is explanatory drawing of the generation of the displacement image when the displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the application example of the displacement image to the displacement target image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of VRAM. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table 1. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display image processing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the generated image and the area which can be displayed by an image display apparatus. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of a decorative symbol in a normal state, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of a decorative symbol in a time-saving state. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the development suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the development suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the development suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the revival effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the revival effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the resurrection effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display color of the crack effect image in the revival effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the look-ahead notice effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the promotion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image generated in the modification, and the area which can be displayed by an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop notification effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the display of the stereoscopic image in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the notice effect during variable display and the development suggestion effect in a modification. It is explanatory drawing when this invention is applied to the slot machine in the modification.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(Characteristic part 241SG form)
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body on the image display device 5). The part where the Z100 can be moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position) and
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can move from the origin position to the effect position).
Equipped with
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are common directions ( For example, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position are common downward directions).
The movement display of the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, the first pseudo). The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the movable body display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32 (see FIGS. 11-37).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by being able to perform an effect having a faster impact than the movement of the movable body by displaying the pseudo movable body.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A display means capable of displaying a pseudo movable body display (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5) is provided.
In the pseudo-movable body display, when the body moves from the first position (for example, the first origin position) to the second position (for example, the first effect position) different from the first position, the reaction motion of a predetermined movement amount is performed. It is a display imitating a movable body (for example, the first non-mounted movable body M100) to be performed.
The display means can move and display the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position corresponding to the first position to the second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may display an image. The display device 5 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the vertical direction between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. Some parts),
The pseudo-movable body display displays a recoil operation of a specific movement amount when the movement is displayed from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100). Is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and when stopped and displayed at the first effect display position, a reactionary motion display (rebound display) of a predetermined movement amount is performed),
The specific movement amount is larger than the predetermined movement amount (for example, the first movement display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). The movement amount L12 of the recoil motion display is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil motion display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first effect position. (See Figure 11-38),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display can realize the same effect as the movable body without mounting the movable body, and the recoil that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position. By displaying the movement in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body on the image display device 5). The part where the Z100 can be moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position) and
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can move from the origin position to the effect position).
An effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect, and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
Pseudo-movable body display effect of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position. 1 The part that can be moved and displayed to the effect display position) and
A movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can move the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position).
Is feasible and
When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed (for example, in the variable display period of the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, the development using the mounted movable body 32. When the effect A and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the game state is controlled to be a big hit game state than when the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed. (Big hit expectation) is high. See Fig. 11-11),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be noticed that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are executed.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo-movable body on the image display device 5). The part where the Z200 can be moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position) and
An effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect, and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
A special suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-movable body display is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a notice effect A foretelling the possibility (expectation degree) that the variable display result becomes a big hit).
A notification effect (for example, a development effect B that notifies the development of a strong super reach effect) that informs the player of advantageous contents, and a notification effect.
A predetermined effect (for example, development effect B) that is executed before the notification effect and suggests that the notification effect is executed by displaying a notification-related image (for example, character image Z310) related to the notification effect. Development suggestion production that suggests the possibility that
Is feasible and
In the predetermined effect, the pseudo-movable body display is displayed by any one of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) having different expectations for executing the notification effect.
The display means is
In the special suggestion effect, the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden ( (See FIGS. 11-25 (C) to (F)),
In the predetermined effect, after the pseudo movable body display is displayed at the second display position, it is hidden without displaying the movement from the second display position to the first display position (FIG. 11-26 (A). )-(J), see FIG. 11-27 (A)),
When the pseudo movable body display displayed at the second display position is hidden before the notification effect is executed, the notification-related image (for example, the notification-related image) is displayed in the display area including the second display position. Character image Z310) can be displayed (see FIGS. 11-26 (F) to (J) and 11-27 (A)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the special suggestion effect, since the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed in the same way as the movable body as a structure, attention should be paid to whether or not the player is controlled in an advantageous state without giving a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the predetermined effect, in the predetermined effect, the display of the notification-related image is prioritized over the moving display in the same manner as the movable body, and the display is not returned from the second display position to the first display position. Since it is hidden, the player can pay attention to the suggestion of executing the notification effect.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 in the first initial display. A part that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first effect display position, and a part that can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position on the image display device 5). ,
An effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect, and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
A special effect for notifying that the player is controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the game is controlled in the jackpot game state) and
A specific effect suggesting that the special effect is executed before the special effect is executed (for example, a development effect B that develops into a strong super reach effect and notifies that the determined effect is executed) and
Is feasible and
The display means is
In the specific effect and the special effect, the pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed.
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed in the specific effect, the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then the first display is performed from the second display position. It is hidden without being moved to a position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special effect (for example, an aspect at the start of display of the reach title image Z51) is displayed in a display area including the second display position. It is possible (see FIGS. 11-27 (B) (D) to (F)),
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed in the special effect, the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then the first display is performed from the second display position. Move to the position and hide it (see FIGS. 11-30 (A) to (F)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, before the special effect is executed, the display of the suggested image is prioritized over the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display in the same manner as the movable body as a structure, and the display of the suggested image is prioritized from the second display position. 1 Since it is hidden without returning to the display position, the player can pay attention to the suggestion of executing the special effect, while in the special effect, the pseudo-movable body display moves and displays in the same way as the movable body. , It is possible to pay attention to the notification of the content advantageous to the player without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 in the first initial display. A part that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first effect display position)
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position).
The movement display of the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed for each display frame in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position (FIG. 11-40 (A)-(C)),
A specific image that emphasizes the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display in the display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position (for example, an image showing a plurality of broken glass pieces due to cracked glass). It is possible to display the effect image Z71) in which the Z71A is scattered (see FIGS. 11-31).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed quickly without deteriorating the visibility, and the movement display can be suitably impressed by the player by emphasizing the movement display with a specific image. can.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of displaying a pseudo-movable body display including a first pseudo-movable body display and a second pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a first pseudo-movable body). The display Z100 can be moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position on the image display device 5. Equipped with a part that can be moved and displayed)
The first pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIGS. 11-16 (B)).
The second pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from the first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIGS. 11-16 (C)).
The display means is
The first pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position) (see FIGS. 11-40 (A) to (C)). ),
The movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed for each display frame in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position. (See FIGS. 11-40 (A)-(C)),
The movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position and the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. (For example, the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. It is faster than the movement display from to the first specific effect display position. See Fig. 11-40),
When the first pseudo-movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, and when the second pseudo-movable body display is moved from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs between when it is displayed (for example, in the advance notice effect B, the pattern in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). When the pattern PBY-4 that is moved and displayed from the PBY-3 or the second initial display position to the second effect display position is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is executed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect. The ratio controlled to the big hit game state (big hit expectation) differs depending on whether the pattern PBY-1 moved to the display position and the pattern PBY-2 moved to the second specific effect display position is executed. See FIGS. 11-10 and 11-20 (B)),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to which of the first pseudo-movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed, and the first pseudo-pseudo in which the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different. The movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display can be recognized by the player by the difference in the speed of the moving display.

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
A movable body (for example, a first non-mounted movable body M100) that can be moved from a first position (for example, a first origin position) to a second position (for example, a first effect position) different from the first position is provided.
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a reaction motion of a certain amount of movement is performed (see FIGS. 11-36).
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, a recoil motion display of a specific movement amount is performed (see FIGS. 11-36).
The specific movement amount is larger than the constant movement amount (for example, the first movement display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). The movement amount L12 of the recoil motion display is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil motion display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first effect position. (See Figure 11-38),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display can realize the same effect as the movable body without mounting the movable body, and the recoil that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position. By displaying the movement in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects.
A movable body (for example, a mounted movable body 32) that can be moved from a first position (for example, an origin position) to a second position (for example, an effect position) different from the first position is provided.
The distance from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the moving display distance L2) is longer than the distance from the first position to the second position (for example, the moving distance L1) (FIG. 11-16),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the movable body, so that it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The gaming machine of the tenth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
The pseudo-movable body display includes an effect display unit (for example, effect display units Z100A, Z200A) and a mechanism display unit (for example, mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B).
In the movement display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display unit reaches the second display position before the effect display unit (see FIGS. 11-36 (B1) and B2).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of the eleventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to tenth aspects.
The movement display from the first display position to the second display position of the pseudo-movable body display is faster than the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, the first pseudo-movable). The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the body display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32 (see FIGS. 11-37).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of the 12th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 11th embodiments.
The moving period between the first position and the second position of the movable body includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases (FIG. 11-39 (A). )reference),
The movement display period of the pseudo-movable body display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 11-39 (B)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth forms.
The pseudo-movable body display includes a light emitting display unit (for example, light emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E).
The display means can display the light emission display unit when the pseudo movable body display is moved to the second display position (the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 first. A portion in which the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A are executed at substantially the same cycle after the movement display to the effect position. See FIG. 11-31 (D).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the pseudo-movable body display that is moved and displayed at the second display position.

The gaming machine of the 14th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 13th embodiments.
The pseudo-movable body display includes a light emitting display unit (for example, light emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E).
The display means does not emit light from the light emitting display unit when the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed (see FIGS. 11-31).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect by making the (incomplete) pseudo-movable body display during the moving display inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of the form 15 is the gaming machine according to the form 13 or the form 14.
The movable body includes a light emitting unit capable of emitting light (for example, light emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E).
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved to the second display position and displayed, the display means displays the light emission of the light emission display unit in the same manner as the light emission of the light emission unit (the effect control CPU 120: A portion in which the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A are executed at substantially the same cycle after the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed to the first effect position. See FIG. 11-31 (D). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of the 16th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 17th embodiments.
The display means can move and display the pseudo-movable body display from the first special display position to the second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the second pseudo-movable). The part where the body display Z200 can be moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position),
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and the direction in which the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first special display position to the second special display position. Is in a different direction (for example, the downward direction in which the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the advance notice effect A, and the advance notice effect B. The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position. See FIGS. 11-33).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since one pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from a plurality of display positions, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

The gaming machine of the 17th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 16th embodiments.
The display means moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and then moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position in a direction different from the direction. It can be moved and displayed (see FIGS. 11-43).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold display 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. An ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a mounted movable body 32, which will be described later, is provided to operate according to the effect. Further, the mounted movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the jackpot game state described later (a start winning has occurred, but it is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a special symbol different from the above (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". The "missing" in the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a "missing time reduction" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the mounted movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is pseudo-like a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating (turning on) the power supply switch 91, power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be transferred to the power supply board 17. Can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control the game state, the game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the mounted movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the mounted movable body 32 to the mounted movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the mounted movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The production control CPU 120 is responsible for audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of the mounted movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the mounted movable body 32, etc.). You may want to do it.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the missing symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the missing symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the gaming stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit" are displayed as the display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit", etc. It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "off", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special map has a set value of 2 to 6 in the first special map and the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (A).

As shown in FIG. 7B, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special figure has the set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "missing time saving" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 8, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1237 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, it is common among the hit determination values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, a range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, a range of 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , The setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the common numerical value range among the hit determination values which can take the value in the range of 0 to 65535 ( When only the numerical value in 1020 to 1346) is assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, it is within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. Numerical values are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1237 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot determination value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set to the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set in the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the playing state is the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, in the case where the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio of the variable display result to be out of time is the same ratio in all the set values, so that the setting value is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Further, regarding the time-reduced deviation to which a common judgment value number is assigned to each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-reduced deviation reference value, in any setting value, it is variablely displayed. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 9 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the mounted movable body 32, such as control for driving the mounted movable body 32 to return to the origin position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a mounted movable body. Control to operate various effect devices such as the drive operation of 32 is performed. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the mounted movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, command to the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, are executed by the output of. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the feature unit 241SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-40. In the following, detailed description will be omitted by adding the same reference numerals to the configurations having the same functions as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic explanation or different in form and arrangement position but having the same functions. The points different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the feature portion 241SG, the mounted movable body 32 is formed to be slightly larger than the mounted movable body 32 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, a vibration motor 61 built in the stick controller 31A is connected to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Is possible. Further, a button LED 62 built in the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the effect control CPU 120 can turn on / off the button LED 62.

FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-3 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is temporarily stopped and then the power supply is restarted. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 sends a power failure recovery designation command if the data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, the initialization designation. Send a command.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state described later corresponds to. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D100 is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, and is executed when neither the first hold storage nor the second hold storage exists in the special symbol normal processing, as will be described later. It is a command transmitted by the demo display setting, and the customer waiting demo effect is executed when a predetermined period elapses after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted.

The commands shown in FIG. 11-3 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-4, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 for the purpose is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. As will be described later, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit set in the RAM 102, to update various numerical data by software. Numerical data indicating a part of the random number values MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 11-5 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, the special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, individual special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the present embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in the present embodiment) (about 1 in the present embodiment). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 11-5 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that becomes It is a table referenced for. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the present embodiment, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is generated in the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable prize ball device 6B. In a high base state where a game ball can easily enter the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 11-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the present embodiment has a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 11-6 (B). In the present embodiment, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" to be transferred and a "non-probability variation jackpot" to be executed only for the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state and to transition to the low probability variation high base state are set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big hit game state by "probability change big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change to the first state advantageous to the player. .. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10 round (10R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5 round (5R) probability variation jackpot. Further, in the big hit game by "probability change big hit C", the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the special in each round is executed. The open period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than that of other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 second), which is a high-speed open jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed even during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the present embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability change big hit C. The opening period (0.1 seconds in this embodiment) is set. After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

That is, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to be "probability variable big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same fluctuation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 11-7). As a result of the variable display, the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 are used. Since it is not possible to distinguish between the "probability change jackpot C" in which the probability variation control is executed and the "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the probability variation control being executed, the probability variation jackpot C After the big hit game or the small hit game is completed, it is possible to continue the game while expecting the player to execute the probability change control.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the jackpot type to the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the winning ball is small. It is possible to prevent the game entertainment from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination values for the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 11-6 shows the variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach variation pattern, normal reach α, normal reach β, ... In addition, a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... May be different. Further, although the super reach α and the super reach β are provided as the super reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type as in the normal reach fluctuation putter.

The variation pattern in the present embodiment includes a variation pattern of a special hit corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 11-7, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the present embodiment is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. Among the fluctuation patterns of super reach, the fluctuation patterns of super reach β and super reach γ have a variable display period longer than the variable display period (50 seconds) of the fluctuation pattern of super reach α (60 seconds). Has been done.

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are first determined as the type of fluctuation pattern, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 11-8 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the game state, the display result of the variable display to be executed, and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot in the normal gaming state (low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variable display result is selected. Using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot variation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot variation pattern). To decide from. Further, when the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B in the normal gaming state (low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and the variation is performed using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. The pattern is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), and PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is different. It's different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. Assigned. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is the probabilistic jackpot A or the probabilistic jackpot B, the variation pattern of the superreach is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variation jackpot. In addition to being easy, the super reach β is easier to determine than the super reach α, so that it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation). Pattern) is decided. That is, in the present embodiment, since the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α deviation variation pattern), and PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. It is assigned, and 7 determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

Further, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the deviation is obtained. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), and PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. It is assigned, and 7 determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

Further, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is obtained. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), and PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. It is assigned, and 7 determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

As described above, when the variable display result is "off" in the present embodiment, the special figure variable display time is normal based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4 or the like. Since the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the variation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3) for shortening, which is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) that is out of reach, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed. However, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot in the high base state, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach γ) It is determined from the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot). If the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B in the low base state, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Determined from (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern). ..

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, the determination values for PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 are determined. The number of allocations is different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 97 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. It is assigned, and 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-4. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 50 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. , PB1-4 are assigned 400 determination values. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is the probabilistic jackpot A or the probabilistic jackpot B, the fluctuation pattern is super reach β or super reach γ at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probable variable jackpot. Since the fluctuation pattern is easily determined, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation). Pattern) is decided. That is, in the present embodiment, since the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Non-reach off-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach off-off fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α off-off fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β off-off fluctuation pattern), and PA2 Determined from -4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ outlier).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table D, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 80 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. It is assigned, 10 determination values are assigned to PA2-3, and 7 determination values are assigned to PA2-4.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "off" in the high base state (time reduction state), the special figure variable display time is a fluctuation of the normal non-reach deviation based on the time reduction state. Since the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the variation pattern (PA1-4) for shortening, which is shorter than the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display result is displayed next while preventing the game from being delayed. It is possible to shorten the period until it becomes a big hit. The fluctuation patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (super reach γ) are considered to be fluctuation patterns that can be executed only in the high base state (time saving state).

The RAM 102 in the present embodiment is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special figure holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game. It includes a control counter setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are reserved data. , The storage number is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are reserved data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Numerical data indicating random numbers, for example, random numbers MR2 to MR4, which are not generated by the random number circuit 104, are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 11-2 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

In the effect control flag setting unit, there are a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the present embodiment, the buffer number 1-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution by the hold storage of the first special figure, and the buffer number 1-1 to the buffer number 1 corresponding to the hold storage 1 to 4 of the first special figure. -4, buffer number 2-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution by the hold storage of the second special figure, buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to the hold storage 1 to 4 of the second special figure. The data that constitutes the start prize reception command buffer is set with entries that can store data such as the start opening prize designation command, symbol specification command, variable category command, and hold storage count notification command. It is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category designation Four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. Then, the four commands of the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold storage number notification command constituting these one set are the buffer numbers corresponding to the start opening prize designation command and the hold storage count notification command. Stored in the entry of.

The storage content of the storage area (entry) corresponding to the buffer numbers 1 to 0 to the buffer number 1-4 corresponding to the first special figure is the highest hold storage (buffer number "1-1"" when the start condition is satisfied. ) Is started, as will be described later, the contents are shifted upward one by one, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are stored. , It is cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the variable display is finished. Similarly, the stored contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to the buffer numbers 2 to 0 to the buffer numbers 1-4 corresponding to the second special figure are the highest held storage (buffer number "2" when the start condition is satisfied. When the variable display of -1 ") is started, it is shifted upward one by one as described later, and the buffer number" 2-0 "that stores the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied is stored. The stored contents are cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the variable display is finished.

The effect control CPU 120 receives a command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. It is stored from the entry), and at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, it is stored from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry among the buffer numbers 2-1 to the buffer number 2-4. .. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage count notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command receive command buffer is an entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (buffer number "1-0" or "2-". What is stored in the entry of "0") is deleted, and is stored in the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1"). The stored content of the entry after the hold storage of the variable display to be started is shifted from that of the entry. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "1-0" is deleted and stored in the buffer number "1-1". Each command is shifted to the buffer number "1-0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-1". Each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". Will be done. Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(Direction during Super Reach)
Here, the production during the super reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-9. FIG. 11-9 is a diagram showing an execution period of various effects in normal reach and super reach.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern or the super reach fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display and then sets the variable display mode to the normal reach display mode. Based on this, a normal reach effect is performed as a variable display effect. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, after executing the normal reach effect, the super reach effect (weak super reach effect or strong super reach effect) is performed as the variable display effect based on the variable display mode being set to the super reach display mode. After the reach production is finished, the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 has a possibility that the variable display result will be a big hit in the normal reach effect in the normal reach variation pattern or the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) as an effect different from the variable display effect (expected). It is possible to execute the advance notice effect A or the advance notice effect B for notifying the degree). Further, in the normal reach effect in the super reach variation pattern, it is possible to execute the development effect A for notifying the development to the weak super reach effect (contents advantageous for the player).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the weak super reach effect in the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) develops into a strong super reach effect (content advantageous for the player). It is possible to execute a development suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that It is possible to execute the development effect B that notifies the content).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a determined effect of notifying that the variable display result is a big hit or an outlier in the strong super reach effect in the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach β, γ). ..

In this way, in the fluctuation pattern of normal reach deviation, it becomes a big hit or miss in the normal reach production without developing into a weak super reach production, and in the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the weak super reach production in the normal reach production. In the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach β, γ), it develops into a strong super reach production in a weak super reach production.

In other words, super reach α is a weak super reach with higher expectations than normal reach, and super reach β and γ are strong super reach with higher expectations than weak super reach (big hit expectation; normal reach <super reach). α <super reach β <super reach γ).

Further, in normal reach and super reach α, β, and γ, different types of normal reach effects and super reach effects may be executed, and common or at least partially similar types of super reach effects may be executed. It may be executed. Further, the types of super reach are not limited to the above three types, and may be one or two types, or four or more types.

In the feature unit 241SG, in the above-mentioned advance notice effect A and advance notice effect B, development effect A, B, development suggestion effect, and decision effect, the mounted movable body 32 which is a structure is moved, and the first pseudo movable body display described later is performed. And the second pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed. Therefore, before explaining the specific contents of each effect, the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display, and the second pseudo-movable body display will be described.

(Flow of development of pachinko gaming machines)
First, in order to understand the background of mounting the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display, the second pseudo-movable body display, and the like on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the development of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The outline of the flow of the above will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12. FIG. 11-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the flow of development of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 11-12, when the development of a predetermined pachinko gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) starts, first, it is clarified what to convey to the game store and the player and what to feel. Create a plan document, etc. (step 241SGS001). Specifically, the game content, highlights, specifications, game flow, reach and other production configurations, board configurations, movable bodies (structures), etc. of the model will be examined.

Next, based on the proposal, a prototype (primary prototype, design mock) of the board (game board), images and materials that can imagine variable display, etc., a spec confirmation table, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage of creating this prototype, for example, it was planned to mount multiple movable bodies, but the reason why multiple movable bodies could not be mounted (for example, lack of space such as interference with other movable bodies, cost, etc. Durability) and other problems may occur.

Next, a video such as a variable display or an effect is created (step 241SGS003). Here, regarding the production video, based on the design and operation of the movable body that could not be mounted due to the problem in step 241SGS002, a pseudo movable body display video that imitates the non-mounted movable body is created. .. Since the movement display in the pseudo-movable body display is inferior in impact to the case of moving the non-mounted movable body, for example, the reaction display operation and the speed of the movement display when the movement display is stopped are performed. In many cases, the display is deformed (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, a prototype (secondary prototype) of the board (game board) including images such as variable display and production is created, and the variable display, core production, movement of the movable body, etc. are confirmed (step 241SGS004). If there is no problem, a mold product or the like for the board surface (game board) is created (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by mounting a plurality of movable bodies capable of providing an impactful effect to the player, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced and the effect can be diversified. It is often difficult to install more than one. Therefore, based on the design and operation of the movable body that could not be mounted, the movement display of the pseudo movable body display that imitates the non-mounted movable body is often used.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 as the feature unit 241SG was planned to be equipped with a plurality of movable bodies at the development stage, but due to the various problems described above, one movable body ( For example, the mounting of the mounted movable body 32) was decided, and the mounting of other movable bodies (for example, the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200) was not decided and was not mounted. Instead of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are imitated. The second pseudo-movable body display, which is a moving display, will be described as being adopted.

In the above, the pseudo-movable body display exemplifies the form adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 which are finally not mounted. It is not limited, and although it was possible to mount a movable body, a pseudo-movable body display may be used in order to diversify the production. It is also possible to use a pseudo-movable body display that imitates a movable body that is not planned to be mounted at the development stage (for example, a virtual movable body or a movable body that is mounted or planned to be mounted on another model).

(Mounted movable body 32)
Hereinafter, the mounted movable body 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-13. 11-13 are views showing the movement mode of the mounted movable body, and FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), the mounted movable body 32 is composed of an effect unit 32A formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view and decorated on the front surface, and a mechanism unit 32B, from the effect unit 32A. The left and right sides of the mechanism unit 32B extending to the left and right sides are supported by the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, so that the upper origin position (FIG. 11-13 (A). ) Is movable in the vertical direction between the origin position indicated by the solid line) and the effect position below the origin position (the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-13 (A)). The mechanism unit 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R to the effect unit 32A.

The drive mechanisms 201L and 201R include the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R, and the driven gears 203L and 203R fixed to the drive shafts of the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R and the driven gears 204L and 204R that mesh with the drive gears 203L and 203R. , The rotating shafts 205L and 205R with the driven gears 204L and 204R fixed to the lower end and facing in the vertical direction, the moving bodies 206L and 206R inserted into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, and the mounted movable body 32 are held at the origin positions. It mainly has a possible mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see FIG. 11-2) that can emit light of a light emitting unit 208A built in the effect unit 32A and composed of the letter "X".

In the mounted movable body 32, the left and right end portions (guided portions) of the mechanical portion 32B are inserted (guided) into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and are locked to the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R. By doing so, it is held at the origin position. When the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on and the locked state is released while being held at the origin position, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position by its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism portion 32B. Comes into contact with the moving bodies 206L and 206R, and the downward movement is restricted so that the vehicle stops at the effect position.

Further, while the spiral groove portion 205A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shafts 205L and 205R, the moving body 206L and 206R have a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove portion 205A on the inner peripheral surface. Since it is formed and the rotation around the rotation shafts 205L and 205R is restricted, the rotation shafts 205L and 205R can be moved in the vertical direction by rotating the rotation shafts 205L and 205R in the forward and reverse directions by the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R. It is said that. Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can fall from the origin position to the effect position by its own weight, and after the fall, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (B), the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R rotate the shaft 205L. , 205R is rotated to raise the moving bodies 206L and 206R, so that the moving bodies 206L and 206R are raised from the effect position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(1st pseudo movable display and 1st non-mounted movable body)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-14. 11-14 is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the first pseudo-movable body display, and FIG. 11-14 is a diagram showing a movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body.

As shown in FIG. 11-14, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 shown in FIG. 11-14 (A) was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, but it was not mounted due to various circumstances. It is said that the image imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100.

The first non-mounted movable body M100, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, is composed of an effect unit M100A and a mechanism unit M100B which are formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view and are decorated on the front surface, and are composed of the effect unit M100A. The left side of the mechanism portion M100B extending to the left is supported by the drive mechanism M101 arranged on the left side of the image display device 5, so that the upper first origin position (2 in FIG. 11-14 (B)) is supported. It is possible to move in the vertical direction between the origin position indicated by the dotted line (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 11-14 (B)) and the first effect position below the first origin position.

The drive mechanism M101 faces the movable body motor M102, the driven gear M103 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M102, the driven gear M104 meshed with the drive gear M103, and the driven gear M104 fixed to the lower end in the vertical direction. The rotating shaft M105, the movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounted movable body M100 at the first origin position, the moving body M106 inserted into the rotating shaft M105, and the effect unit M100A are built in and viewed from the front. It mainly has a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) capable of emitting light from a circular light emitting unit M108A.

Further, the effect unit M100A has four effect movable units M110A to M110D arranged around the light emitting unit M108A with a streak-shaped decoration on the front surface, and the effect movable units M110A to M110D are close to each other. It is possible to change between an effect state (a state shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-14 (B)) and a second effect state in which the effect movable portions M110A to M110D are radially separated from the light emitting unit M108A.

In the first non-mounted movable body M100, the left end portion (guided portion) of the mechanical portion M100B is inserted (guided) vertically into the rotation shaft M105 and locked to the movable body solenoid M107. 1 Held at the origin position. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on and the locked state is released while being held at the first origin position, the first non-mounted movable body M100 is dropped from the first origin position by its own weight, and the mechanism unit M100B. The left and right ends of the above come into contact with the moving body M106, and the downward movement is restricted so that the vehicle stops at the first effect position.

Further, while the spiral groove portion M105A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M105, the moving body M106 has a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove portion M105A on the inner peripheral surface thereof. Since the rotation around the rotation shaft M105 is restricted, it is possible to move in the vertical direction by rotating the rotation shaft M105 in the forward and reverse directions by the movable body motor M102. Therefore, the first non-mounted movable body M100 can fall from the first origin position to the first effect position by its own weight, and after the fall, the rotating shaft M105 is rotated by the movable body motor M102 to rotate the moving body M106. By raising it, it rises from the first effect position to the first specific origin position, and is held at the first origin position by the movable body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 11-14 (A), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is an image imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100, and is an effect display unit Z100A corresponding to the effect unit M100A and a mechanism unit. It has a mechanism display unit Z100B corresponding to the M100B and a light emitting display unit Z108A corresponding to the light emitting unit M108A. Then, it is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position (see FIG. 11-16 (B)). ), It is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to a position different from the first effect position (Fig.). 11-17 (A)). Further, the effect unit M100A has the effect movable display units Z110A to Z110D corresponding to the effect movable units M110A to M110D, and has a first effect display state corresponding to the first effect state and a second effect display state corresponding to the second effect state. It is possible to change to the production display state.

(2nd pseudo movable display and 2nd non-mounted movable body)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-15. 11-15 is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the second pseudo-movable body display, and FIG. 11-15 is a diagram showing a movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body.

As shown in FIGS. 11-15 (B) and 11-15 (C), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 shown in FIG. 11-15 (A) was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, but it is not possible due to various circumstances. It is said to be an image imitating the mounted second non-mounted movable body M200.

Regarding the second non-mounted movable body M200, two mounting plans having different operation modes at the beginning of development (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in FIGS. 11-15 (B) and mounting plan 1 shown in FIG. 11-15 (C)) are shown. The mounting plan 2) was devised, but due to development reasons, the second non-mounted movable body itself could not be mounted, so the movement corresponding to the mounting plan 1 described below is used as the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. The display and the movement display corresponding to the mounting plan 2 can be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-15 (B) and 11-15 (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200 not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a directing unit M200A formed in a front view circular shape and decorated on the front surface. A first effect device (mounting plan 1: FIG. 11-15), which is composed of a mechanism unit M200B and is supported by a first drive mechanism M201A in which the lower end of the mechanism unit M100B is arranged on the lower side of the image display device 5. B)) and the second effect device (mounting plan 2: see FIG. 11-15 (C)) in which the upper end of the mechanism unit M100B is supported by the second drive mechanism M201B arranged above the image display device 5. It is incorporated in each of.

As shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), the first drive mechanism M201A is a rotating body rotated by a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202 and a movable body motor (not shown). It has an M203 and a guide rail M204 that guides the effect unit M200A so as to be movable in the vertical direction. One end of the mechanism portion M200B is rotatably supported with respect to the base member M202 about a rotation shaft facing in the front-rear direction, and a connecting shaft M205 projecting from the peripheral edge portion on the front surface of the rotating body M203 slides. An elongated hole M206 that can be inserted is formed.

Therefore, in the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A, the rotating body M203 is rotated by the movable body motor (not shown), and the mechanism portion M200B is rotated around the rotation axis. The lower first specific origin position (origin position indicated by a two-point chain line in FIG. 11-15 (B)) and the first specific effect position above the first specific origin position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 11-15 (B)). It is possible to move up and down between the position).

Further, the effect unit M200A includes a rotating unit M207 having a circular front view and a non-mounted movable LED (not shown) capable of emitting light from a plurality of (for example, five) light emitting units M208A to M208E provided in the rotating unit M207. The non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) lights up while the rotating unit M207 rotates, and the light emitting units M208A to M208E can emit light in a plurality of colors (for example, 7 colors). There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (C), the second drive mechanism M201B is a driven gear that meshes with the movable body motor M212, the drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M212, and the drive gear M213. It mainly has M214 and a rotation shaft M215 that faces the left-right direction in which the driven gear M214 is fixed to the left end. Further, while the spiral groove portion M215A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M215, the mechanism portion M200B extending upward from the effect portion M200A is locked to the groove portion M215A on the inner peripheral surface. A portion (not shown) is formed, and rotation around the rotation shaft M215 is restricted.

Therefore, in the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B, the rotation shaft M215 is rotated in the forward and reverse directions by the movable body motor M212, so that the second specific origin position on the left side (FIG. 11-15 (C)). ) Is movable in the left-right direction between the origin position indicated by the two-point chain line) and the second specific effect position on the right side (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 11-15 (C)), and the second specific origin. It is possible to stop at the second intermediate effect position, which is intermediate between the position and the second specific effect position.

As shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is an image imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200, and is an effect display unit Z200A corresponding to the effect unit M200A and a mechanism unit. It has a mechanism display unit Z200B corresponding to the M200B, a rotation display unit Z207 corresponding to the rotation unit M207, and light emission display units Z208A to Z208E corresponding to the light emission units M208A to M208E.

At the beginning of development, it was planned to install a full-color LED as a non-mounted movable LED (not shown), but due to cost reasons, it may be necessary to install a single-color LED, but the second pseudo-movable display Z200 Therefore, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E can be light-emittingly displayed in a plurality of colors (for example, 7 colors) without considering the cost aspect.

Then, it is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and the first specific effect display position corresponding to the first specific effect position (FIGS. 11-16). (See (C)), it is possible to move and display in the left-right direction between the second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and the second specific effect display position corresponding to the second specific effect position (Fig.). 11-17 (B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17. 11-16 show the movable range of the non-mounted movable body, (B) the moving display area of the first pseudo-movable body display, and (C) the moving display area of the second pseudo-movable body display. It is a figure. 11-17 is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the first pseudo-movable body display and (B) a specific movement display area of the second pseudo-movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the mounted movable body 32 has an origin position where the lower part of the effect unit 32A overlaps at the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5 and an abbreviation of the display area of the image display device 5. It is possible to move in the vertical direction between the effect position where the effect unit 32A and the mechanism unit 32B overlap at the center, and the movement distance from the origin position to the effect position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 has a first initial display position in which the lower portion of the effect display unit Z100A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5. It is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the first effect display position where the effect display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at a position substantially below the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first initial display. The moving display distance from the position to the first effect display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 11-17 (A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 has a first specific initial display position in which the upper part of the effect display unit Z100A is displayed at the lower position of the display area of the image display device 5. , It is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the first specific effect display position where the effect display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at a position substantially above the center of the display area of the image display device 5. The specific movement display distance from the specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is L2A.

As described above, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 has the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position, similarly to the first non-mounted movable body M100. Not only is it possible to move and display the movable range between them in the vertical direction, but it is also possible to specifically move between the second initial display position that does not correspond to the first origin position and the second effect display position that does not correspond to the first effect position. The range can be moved and displayed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (C), in the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the lower portion of the effect display unit Z200A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5, the first specific initial stage. It is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the display position and the first specific effect display position where the effect display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at a substantially central position of the display area of the image display device 5. The movement display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is L3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (B), in the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the right portion of the effect display unit Z200A is displayed at the left portion position of the display area of the image display device 5. It is possible to move and display in the left-right direction between the initial display position and the second specific effect display position where the effect display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at a substantially central position of the display area of the image display device 5. The moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, has a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific effect corresponding to the first specific effect position. Not only is it possible to move and display the movable range between the display position in the vertical direction, but also the second specific initial display position that does not correspond to the first specific origin position and the second specific effect display that does not correspond to the first specific effect position. The specific movable range between the position and the position can be moved and displayed in the left-right direction.

Further, the moving display distance L2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is longer than the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the moving display distance L3 of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. Shorter than (L2> L1> L3). Further, the moving display distance L2A of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is longer than the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the moving display distance L3A of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. And the movement display distance is longer than L2A (L3A> L2A> L1).

In this way, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can move and display a movement display distance (L2, L2A, L3A) longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect that has more impact than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in FIGS. 11-16, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are composed of the effect display units Z100A and Z200A and the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B, and the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B. Is extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and is produced by the drive mechanism M101, the first drive mechanism M201A, and the second drive mechanism M201B arranged on the side of the image display device 5. Since the display units Z100A and Z200A appear to be supported, it is possible to express the moving display more realistically.

That is, the pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) refers to a movable body as a structure that can be operated by a drive mechanism, such as a movable body mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-mounted movable body, and a virtual movable body. The display is imitated and is different from, for example, an image having no mechanism display unit such as the development notification image Z300 (see FIG. 11-25 (H)).

In addition, a display in which a part of the display mode is different from that of the movable body as a model, a display in a mode that cannot be realized by the movable body as a model (for example, a deformed display or a deformed display) or a moving display (for example, a high-speed moving display, etc.) ) Is possible.

Further, the pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) may be an image or a moving image created by a computer or the like, or may be an image or a moving image of a moving body as an actually created structure. There may be. Furthermore, when moving the pseudo-movable body display, the same or similar sound effect as the sound effect output when the movable body is moved or the impact sound generated when the movable body is stopped can be output, or the pseudo-movable body display can be displayed as an effect. It is more realistic by generating a pseudo impact by vibrating the push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc. with the vibration motor 61 when reaching the position, or by outputting deep bass from the speakers 8L, 8R. It becomes possible to provide the production to the player.

Next, the details of various effects using the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10. FIG. 11-10 is a diagram for explaining the contents and configurations of various effects in Super Reach.

(Notice production A)
As shown in FIG. 11-10, the advance notice effect A can be executed when the base state is low, and the first specific effect is displayed after the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. It is suggested that the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E may be a big hit (expected degree) by displaying the light emission in the color corresponding to the determined effect pattern after the movement is displayed at the display position.

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is erased after being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See FIGS. 11-25 (C) to (F)).

Specifically, when the pattern PYA-1 is determined in the advance notice effect A type determination process of step 241SGS278A described later, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, and when the pattern PYA-2 is determined, light is emitted. The display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue, and when the pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green, and when the pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed. Displayed in red. Therefore, the emission display color of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E having the highest expectation of big hit is red. The emission color can be changed in various ways, and if the jackpot is confirmed, the emission color may be changed to gold, rainbow, or the like.

(Notice production B)
The notice effect B can be executed when the base is in a high base state, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. The variable display result is a big hit depending on whether it is moved and displayed, or whether the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position. It is suggested that there is a possibility (expectation).

Further, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moved and displayed at the first effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position (FIG. 11-34 (A)). ~ (C)). Further, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moved and displayed at the second effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second effect display position to the second initial display position (FIG. 11-34 (D)). ~ (F)).

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position (FIGS. 11-33). (A)-(C)). Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position (FIGS. 11-33). (D)-(F)).

Specifically, when the pattern PYB-1 is determined in the advance notice effect B type determination process of step 241SGS278A described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position. When the pattern PYB-2 is displayed and the pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position, and when the pattern PYB-3 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed. 1 Pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and when the pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is the second effect from the second initial display position. Moved to the display position and displayed. Therefore, the movement display pattern in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed has a higher jackpot expectation than the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed, and the movement display pattern having the highest jackpot expectation is the first. The pseudo movable body display Z100 is a pattern in which the pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position.

Further, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is second. It is faster than moving and displaying from the specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position.

(Development production A)
In the development effect A, the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the effect position, so that the development to the weak super reach is notified (see FIG. 11-25 (H)). The mounted movable body 32 moved from the origin position to the effect position rises from the effect position to the origin position and returns after a predetermined time has elapsed.

More specifically, when the execution is decided in the development effect A type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position at the effect start timing, thereby developing into a weak super reach. Is notified (see FIG. 11-25 (H)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position at the production start timing, and the development notification image Z300 is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the development to weak super reach is notified. (See FIG. 11-25 (G)). That is, when the non-execution is determined in the development effect A type determination process, the effect pattern for notifying the development to the weak super reach is determined by displaying the development notification image Z300 without dropping the mounted movable body 32. Is.

The development notification image Z300 is an image (display) that imitates the mounted movable body 32, but like the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it is the same as the movable body. Unlike the pseudo-movable body display that is moved and displayed, it is an image (display) that imitates only the effect unit 32A, and is displayed in a display mode different from the movement of the mounted movable body 32. For example, at the effect start timing, the display is displayed at the effect display position corresponding to the effect position of the mounted movable body 32 from the beginning without accompanying the movement display.

(Development suggestion production)
The development suggestion effect can be executed before the development effect B is executed, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed in the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific effect display position. After that, light is emitted based on the fact that the repeated hitting operation is detected during the operation valid period in which the continuous hitting operation of the push button 31B by the player (the operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected multiple times within a predetermined period) is valid. By changing the display units Z208A to Z208E to the emission display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, it is suggested that the display color of the character image Z310 described later, that is, the development effect B may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, an operation promotion image (for example, an image imitating the push button 31B) that promotes the continuous striking operation of the push button 31B during the operation valid period in which the continuous striking operation of the push button 31B in the development suggestion effect is effective). Is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the button LED 62 (see FIG. 11-2) built in the push button 31B is turned on to promote the continuous striking operation of the push button 31B. The image display device 5 may display an operation promotion display that promotes the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B during the operation valid period.

Further, in the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the character image Z310 related to the model is first specified in the display area of the image display device 5. After being displayed so as to overlap (act) on the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in the area including the effect display position, it is erased without being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See FIGS. 11-26 (A) to (J) and FIGS. 11-27 (A)).

Specifically, when the pattern PS-1 is determined in the development suggestion effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E remain white even when the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, and do not change. When the pattern PS-2 is determined, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E change in the order of white → blue according to the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B, and when the pattern PS-3 is determined, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E. Changes in the order of white → blue → green according to the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B, and when the pattern PS-4 is determined, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E change from white → blue → according to the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B. It changes in the order of green → red. Therefore, the final emission display color of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E having the highest execution expectation of the development effect B is red.

The emission color and the change pattern of the emission color can also be changed in various ways. For example, the emission color may be changed from white to red without changing to blue or green, or may be a emission display color other than white from the beginning. .. Further, the number of lightings of the plurality of light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E is increased according to the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B, so that the execution expectation of the development effect B is higher than the case where the number of lightings is large. You may. Further, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the emission color and the number of emissions.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, when the continuous striking operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the operation valid period, or when the continuous striking operation amount is small, even if any of the patterns PS-2 to 4 is determined, the continuous striking operation amount is used. Illustrated a form in which the emission display color does not change according to each pattern PS-2 to 4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the operation valid period. Alternatively, even when the amount of repeated hitting operations is small, the emission display color may be changed according to the determined patterns PS-2 to 4 at the timing when the operation valid period ends.

Further, as the character image Z310 displayed after the operation valid period ends, the character image Z310 having a color corresponding to the light emission display color of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E when the operation valid period ends is displayed. There is.

It should be noted that the character images Z310 having different types may be displayed according to the emission display colors of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E when the operation valid period ends. Further, even when the emission display color of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E does not change even though any of the patterns PS-2 to 4 is determined as described above, the determined patterns PS-2 to 4 are not changed. Character images Z310 (colors different from the light emission display colors of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E) may be displayed according to the color corresponding to the above. Further, the emission display color of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development production B)
In the development effect B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves and displays from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, thereby developing into a strong super reach effect and executing the determined effect (game). (Contents that are advantageous to the person) are notified (see FIG. 11-27 (D)). Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position (FIG. 11-27 (FIG. 11-27). D)-(F)).

Further, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased without moving from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, the reach title is set in the display area including the first specific effect display position. By displaying the image Z51 so as to overlap the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in an manner indicating that it is the time when the display of the image is started, the variable display result becomes a big hit (controlled to the big hit gaming state). ) Is suggested.

Specifically, when execution is determined in the development effect B type determination process of step 241SGS280 described later, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 changes from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position at the effect start timing. By displaying the movement, the development to strong super reach is notified (see FIG. 11-27 (D)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position at the effect start timing, and the reach title image Z51 is displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed in the ready state mode to inform the development of strong super reach (see FIG. 11-27 (C)). That is, the fact that non-execution is determined by the development effect B type determination process means that the reach title image Z51 is displayed in the prepared state without moving and displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, thereby leading to strong super reach. It is to determine the production pattern that informs the development of.

(Decisive production)
The deciding effect is to settle the battle confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character, which was executed in the super reach effect, and notify whether or not the game is controlled by the jackpot game state. Specifically, for example, after displaying that the ally character gives the last blow to the enemy character, the operation promotion display of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is performed to the player, and the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is displayed. By moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the operation of the stick controller 31A is not detected and the operation valid period ends, the enemy character Either the big hit confirmation notification that defeats the player and wins the battle, or the loss confirmation notification that the mounted movable body 32 is defeated by the enemy character without being moved from the origin position to the production position and is defeated in the battle is performed.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the variable display result is out of order, and the pattern KB-2, which is a pattern in which an out-of-order confirmation notification is performed in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character and is defeated in a battle. KV-2 is selected when the variable display result is a big hit, and the pattern is such that the big hit confirmation notification is performed in which the ally character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle.

Further, in the patterns KB-2 and KV-2, the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. Then, the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

Further, when the execution of the pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282 described later, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position at the drop timing of the mounted movable body 32. After moving to and returning to the origin position from the effect position, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position to change the decorative pattern. The display is resumed. Then, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the variable display result becomes a big hit (FIG. 11). -29 (E) to (G), FIGS. 11-30 (A) to (F)).

On the other hand, when the execution of the pattern KB-1 or KV-1 is decided, the mounted movable body 32 does not move from the origin position at the fall timing of the mounted movable body 32, and the effect image Z57 in which the glass is cracked is displayed. The loss confirmation notification is performed, and the variable display result is lost (see FIGS. 11-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, about the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 in the super reach β and γ (strong super reach) and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the jackpot expectation degree according to the execution status. , 11-11 will be described. FIG. 11-11 is a diagram showing the degree of expectation of a big hit for each execution status of the development effect A and the development effect B.

As shown in FIGS. 11-11, the pattern A is a pattern in which both the development effect A and the development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β and γ (strong super reach). Yes, the pattern B is a pattern in which the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed, the pattern C is a pattern in which the development effect A is executed and the development effect B is not executed, and the pattern D is. This is a pattern in which both the development effect A and the development effect B are executed.

In the above, the jackpot expectation is set so as to increase in the order of pattern A <pattern B <pattern C <pattern D. That is, in the variable display period of the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β or the super reach γ, the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. In the case, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit expectation) is higher than when the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed. Further, the rate at which the development effect A and the development effect B are executed is controlled to the jackpot game state more than when the development effect A is executed without the development effect B being executed (big hit expectation). Is high. Further, when the development effect A and the development effect B are executed, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit expectation degree) is higher than when the development effect A and the development effect B are not executed.

11-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 10. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers “1-0” to “1-4” of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted higher by one buffer number (step 241SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 241SGS271 (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). When the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (step 241SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stopped symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, "7" as a stop symbol. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probabilistic big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probabilistic big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. Determine (missing symbol).

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277), and when it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a superreach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277). Y), the advance notice effect type determination process shown in FIG. 11-19 is executed to determine the effect pattern (effect type) of the advance notice effect A or the advance notice effect B in the variable display (step 241SGS278A), and FIG. 11- The development effect A type determination process shown in 21 (A) is executed to determine the effect pattern (effect type) of the development effect A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). When it is not a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 11-19, in the advance notice effect type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (missing, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probabilistic jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature unit 241SG, since the target of the advance notice effect is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, non-probability change big hit) or miss. Which of these may be specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. It should be noted that the case of the probabilistic jackpot C may be excluded as the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the low base state (time saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is in the low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), the random number for determining the advance notice effect. Is extracted, and the effect pattern of the advance notice effect A is determined using the advance notice effect type determination table A shown in FIG. 11-20 (A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, when it is not in the low base state, that is, in the high base state (step 241SGS302; N), the random number for determining the advance notice effect is extracted, and the notice effect type determination table B shown in FIG. 11-20 (B) is extracted. Is used to determine the effect pattern of the advance notice effect B (step 241SGS304).

As shown in FIG. 11-20 (A), in the notice effect A type determination table, "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4" For each, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot (either probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, or probabilistic jackpot C), non-probable variable jackpot, super reach is lost, or normal reach is missed. Different determination values are assigned to each of the above so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIG. 11-20 (A).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". Therefore, 30 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYA-3", and 50 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYA-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is out of the super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". Eight determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and two determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4".

By assigning the determination value in this way, "Pattern PYA-4" is determined at the highest ratio when a probability variation jackpot is obtained in the variable display, and "Pattern" is determined when a non-probability variation jackpot is obtained. "PYA-3" is determined at the highest rate, and "Pattern PYA-1" is determined at the highest rate when the super reach is lost or the normal reach is lost. That is, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest expectation of big hit, and "Pattern PYA-4"> "Pattern PYA-3"> "Pattern PYA-2"> "Pattern PYA-1" has the lowest expectation of big hit. Become. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

As shown in FIG. 11-20 (B), in the notice effect B type determination table, "Pattern PYB-1", "Pattern PYB-2", "Pattern PYB-3", and "Pattern PYB-4" For each, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot (either probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, or probabilistic jackpot C), non-probable variable jackpot, super reach is lost, or normal reach is missed. Different determination values are assigned to each of the above so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIG. 11-20 (B).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". Therefore, 30 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-3", and 50 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is out of the super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". Eight determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-3", and two determination values are assigned to the "pattern PYB-4".

By assigning the determination value in this way, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined at the highest ratio when a probability variation jackpot is obtained in the variable display, and "Pattern" is determined when a non-probability variation jackpot is obtained. "PYB-3" is determined at the highest rate, and "Pattern PYB-1" is determined at the highest rate when the super reach is lost or the normal reach is lost. That is, "Pattern PYB-4" has the highest expectation of big hit, and "Pattern PYB-3"> "Pattern PYB-3"> "Pattern PYB-2"> "Pattern PYB-1" has the lowest expectation of big hit. Become. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

In the feature unit 241SG, a mode in which the determination ratio of each pattern is the same in the notice effect A type determination table for the low base state and the notice effect B type determination table for the high base state is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be different between the advance notice effect A type determination table and the advance notice effect B type determination table.

Returning to FIG. 11-19, in step 241SGS305, the advance notice effect type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306, a period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect (step 241SGS306), and the process is terminated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-21, in the development effect A type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (missing, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probabilistic jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In this feature unit 241SG, since the target of the development effect A is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, non-probability change big hit) or. It may be specified by the variable display result specification command whether it is out of alignment, and whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach by the fluctuation pattern specification command. It should be noted that the case of the probability variation jackpot C may be excluded as the target of the development effect A.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development effect type, and determines the effect pattern of the development effect A using the development effect A type determination table shown in FIG. 11-21 (B) (step 241SGS312). ).

As shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), in the development effect A type determination table, the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot A, probability variation jackpot A) for each of the "non-execution" and "execution" patterns. B, Probability change jackpot C), non-probability change jackpot, super reach loss, normal reach loss, and different judgment values are shown in FIG. 11-21 (B). It is assigned to be a number of values.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, 10 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 90 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the variable display result is out of the super reach, 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution". That is, if the normal reach is off, the development effect A is not executed because the weak super reach effect does not develop.

By assigning the judgment value in this way, when the variable display is a probabilistic jackpot or a non-probabilistic jackpot, "execution" is determined at the highest ratio, and when the super reach is lost or the normal reach is missed. "Non-execution" is determined at the highest rate. That is, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the development effect A is executed than when it is not executed. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 11-21 (A), in step 241SGS313, the development effect A type determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, a period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the development effect A (step 241SGS314), and the process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 11-18, after executing the process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279), and super reach fluctuation. When it is a pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), the development suggestion effect type determination process shown in FIG. 11-22 (A) is executed, and the effect pattern (effect type) of the development suggestion effect is determined in the variable display (step). 241SGS280), the development effect B type determination process shown in FIG. 11-23 (A) is executed to determine the effect pattern (effect type) of the development effect B in the variable display (step 241SGS281), and FIG. 11-24 (step 241SGS281). The effect pattern (effect type) of the determined effect is determined in the variable display by executing the determined effect B type determination process shown in A) (step 241SGS282). When it is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, when it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), the process proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 11-22 (A), in the development suggestion effect type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS321). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (missing, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probabilistic jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature unit 241SG, since the target of the advance notice effect is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, non-probability change big hit) or miss. Which of these may be specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. It should be noted that the case of the probabilistic jackpot C may be excluded as the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development suggestion effect, and determines the effect pattern of the development suggestion effect using the development suggestion effect type determination table shown in FIG. 11-22 (B) (step 241SGS322). ).

As shown in FIG. 11-22 (B), in the development suggestion effect type determination table, "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" For each, the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot (any of probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, and probabilistic jackpot C), non-probable variable jackpot, super reach is off, and normal reach is off. Different determination values are assigned to each of the above so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIG. 11-20 (A).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probable change jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". 30 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PS-3", and 50 determination values are assigned to the "pattern PS-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PS-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is out of the super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PS-3", and 5 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PS-4".

By assigning the judgment value in this way, "Pattern PS-4" is determined at the highest ratio when the probability variation jackpot is obtained in the variable display, and "Pattern" is determined when the non-probability variation jackpot is obtained. "PS-3" is determined at the highest rate, and "Pattern PS-1" is determined at the highest rate when the super reach is out of order. That is, "Pattern PS-4" has the highest expectation of big hit, and "Pattern PS-4"> "Pattern PS-3"> "Pattern PS-2"> "Pattern PS-1" has the lowest expectation of big hit. Become. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 11-22 (A), in step 241SGS323, the development suggestion effect type determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, a period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the development suggestion effect (step 241SGS324), and the process is terminated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (A), in the development effect B type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (missing, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probabilistic jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature unit 241SG, since the target of the advance notice effect is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, non-probability change big hit) or miss. Which of these may be specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. It should be noted that the case of the probabilistic jackpot C may be excluded as the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the development effect determination random number and determines the effect pattern of the development effect B using the development effect B type determination table shown in FIG. 11-23 (B) (step 241SGS332). ..

As shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), in the development effect B type determination table, the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot A, probability variation jackpot A) for each of the "non-execution" and "execution" patterns. B, Probability change jackpot C), non-probability change jackpot, super reach loss, normal reach loss, different judgment values are shown in FIG. 11-23 (B). It is assigned to be a number of values.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 30 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 70 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the variable display result is out of the super reach β / γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to “non-execution” and 70 judgment values are assigned to “execution”. .. Further, when the variable display result is out of the super reach α, 100 determination values are assigned to “non-execution”. That is, if the super reach α is out of alignment, the development effect B is not executed because it does not develop into a strong super reach effect.

By assigning the judgment value in this way, when the variable display is a probabilistic jackpot or a non-probabilistic jackpot, "execution" is determined at the highest ratio, and when the super reach is lost or the normal reach is missed. "Non-execution" is determined at the highest rate. That is, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the development effect B is executed than when it is not executed. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 11-23 (A), in step 241SGS333, the development effect B type determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, the period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the development effect B (step 241SGS334), and the process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), in the determination effect type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines the determination effect type shown in FIG. 11-24 (B) based on the variable display result specified in step 241SGS301. The effect pattern of the determined effect is determined using the table (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined determined effect type is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), the period until the effect is started is set in the timer for waiting for the determined effect (step 241SGS343), and the process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (B), in the determination effect type determination table, an operation promotion display is performed in which the operation of the push button 31B is enabled and the player is encouraged to perform a single push operation of the push button 31B. "KB-1", "Pattern KB-2", "Pattern KV-1", "Pattern KV-" that enables the operation of the stick controller 31A and displays an operation promotion display to the player to promote the single pull operation of the stick controller 31A. For each of 2 ”, the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot (any of probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, and probabilistic jackpot C), a non-probabilistic jackpot, and a super reach loss. Different determination values are assigned so as to be the number of determination values shown in FIG. 11-24 (B).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KB-2" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KV-2". Assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability change jackpot, 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KV-2". ing. When the variable display result is out of the super reach β / γ, 70 judgment values are assigned to the “pattern KB-1” and 30 judgment values are assigned to the “pattern KV-1”. Is assigned.

When the determination value is assigned in this way and a probability variation jackpot is obtained in the variable display, the "pattern KV-1" whose operation target is the stick controller 31A is determined at the highest ratio, and the non-probability variation jackpot is determined. In the case of, "Pattern KB-2" in which the operation target is the push button 31B is determined at the highest ratio, and in the case of out of super reach, "Pattern KB-1" in which the operation target is the push button 31B is determined. Is determined at the highest rate. That is, the probability variation jackpot expectation is higher when the stick controller 31A is the operation target than when the push button 31B is the operation target. The determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

In this feature unit 241SG, the random number for determining the advance notice effect, the random number for determining the development effect A, the random number for determining the development suggestion effect, the random number for determining the development effect B, and the random number for determining the decision effect are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, respectively. Any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, although the number is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100 of the number of determination values of these various effect determination random numbers, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these various effect determination random numbers and the like are appropriate. You just have to decide. Further, an effect determination random number counter for generating these various effect determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and the effect determination random number counter is updated for each timer interruption in the random number update process. Further, a common random number may be used as the random numbers for determining various effects.

The feature unit 241SG exemplifies a form in which the effect patterns of various effects are determined in the various effect type determination processes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a character appears in addition to the above effects. It may be decided to execute a notice effect such as a character notice effect, a step-up notice in which the notice image changes stepwise, and a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area. In the case of determining, since the timing for starting the advance notice effect differs depending on the mode of the advance notice effect, a different period may be set according to the mode of the advance notice effect in the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 11-18, in step 241SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 241SGS284).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 241SGS285). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 241SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 241SGS286). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data during variable display including the image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right to the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting process (step 241SGS288).

(Example of super reach β production operation)
Next, an example of the effect of the super reach β will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-25 to 11-31. 11-25 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of super reach β mainly in normal reach in FIGS. 11-25. 11-26 are diagrams in which FIGS. 11-26 show an example of a directing operation mainly in a weak super reach. 11-27 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation in the weak super reach as shown in FIGS. 11-27. 11-28 are diagrams in which FIGS. 11-28 show an example of a directing operation mainly in a strong super reach. 11-29 is a diagram showing an example of an effect of a strong super reach effect in FIGS. 11-29. 11-30 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation after the big hit confirmation notification is shown in FIGS. 11-30. 11-31 is a diagram showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display in FIGS. 11-31. 11-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED.

Hereinafter, various production operation examples in the variable display period based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-25 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a variable manner based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β based on the occurrence of the start winning prize. To start. Further, in the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5, the first reserved storage number (for example, the number "2"), the second reserved storage number (for example, the number "0"), and the small corresponding to the decorative symbol are displayed. A display area 5SL for displaying a symbol (for example, an arrow “↓↓↓”) is provided, and a small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Regarding the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, the small symbol, and the error display (not shown) indicating the error state generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo Since it is displayed on the front side (upper layer) of the movable body display Z200, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are duplicated, and the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, and the small number are duplicated. While it is possible to prevent the visibility of the symbol and the error display from being lowered, the decorative symbol is displayed on the back side (lower layer) of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. Therefore, it is prevented that the decorative symbols overlap and the visibility of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is deteriorated.

After starting the variable display, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B), when the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, the normal reach effect as the variable display effect of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-25 (C), the effect control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position at the start timing of the advance notice effect A in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. After displaying in, it is moved to the first specific effect display position (see FIG. 11-25 (D)), and as shown in FIG. 11-25 (E), it is determined by the advance notice effect type determination process of step 241SGS278A. By causing the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E to emit light with the display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1 to 4), the advance notice effect A suggesting that the jackpot game state is controlled is executed. Further, an effect image Z60 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position.

The effect image Z60 is displayed in a mode corresponding to the emission display colors of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the emission display colors of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on the pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and the display size is small, and the emission display units Z208A to Z208A based on the pattern PYA-4. When the emission display color of the Z208E is emitted in red, it is preferable that the effect image Z60 is red and the display size is increased according to the degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (F), the effect image Z60 is erased, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and then the second is displayed. By erasing the pseudo movable body display Z200, the advance notice effect A ends. After that, the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5 in a manner slightly larger than the small symbol.

Then, when the non-execution of the development effect A is determined in the development effect A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (G), the mounted movable body is at the start timing of the development effect A. While holding the development notification image Z300 at the origin position without dropping the 32, the development notification image Z300 is displayed and the effect image Z61A is displayed around the development notification image Z61A to notify that the development to a weak super reach effect is developed. Further, when the execution of the development effect A is decided, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (H), the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on at the start timing of the development effect A, and the mounted movable body is turned on. The 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around the effect image Z61B to notify that the effect image Z61B is developed into a weak super reach effect.

In the feature unit 241SG, the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher when the mounted movable body 32 is dropped as the development effect A than when it is not executed, but the development effect A (mounted movable body 32). Even when the non-execution of (falling) is determined, it is possible to notify that the development notification image Z300 will be developed into a weak super reach effect by displaying the development notification image Z300.

As shown in FIGS. 11-26 (A), the effect control CPU 120 starts a weak super reach effect by displaying a character image Z310 or the like after the execution period of the development effect A ends, and also starts a second pseudo. After the movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position, it is moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position to start the development suggestion effect (see FIG. 11-26 (B)). At this time, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is partially displayed so as to overlap the front side of the character image Z310.

Further, as a development suggestion effect, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is turned on. , Promotes the operation of the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. When any of the patterns (PS-2 to 4) is determined in the development suggestion effect type determination process of step 241SGS280, the push button 31B during the operation valid period is as shown in FIGS. 11-26 (D). The effect image Z62 is enlarged according to the repeated hitting operation (number of times of operation detection), and the emission display color of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E is changed every time a predetermined time elapses. Suggests that B is executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-26 (E), the blackout display is used to darken the background image while maintaining the emission display colors of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E even after the operation valid period ends. After that, a small-sized character image Z310 having the same color as the light emission display color of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E when the operation valid period ends is displayed at a position above the second pseudo movable body display Z200, and the character image Z310 is displayed. After displaying the effect image Z63 for emphasizing (see FIG. 11-26 (F)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 11-26 (G)), and then the middle. After displaying the character image Z310 of the size (see FIG. 11-26 (H)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 11-26 (I)), and then the large size is displayed. The character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 11-26 (J)).

In FIGS. 11-26 (E) to (J), it is preferable that the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E continue to display the light emission, but the effect image Z62 is not displayed, in consideration of the appearance of the effect.

In this way, the character images Z310 having the same color as the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in a manner of gradually increasing from the back side to the front side of the screen, and the small size, medium size, and large size character images Z310 are displayed. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 11-26 (J) in FIGS. 11-27, the second pseudo-movable body display is displayed in the area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. By overlapping the Z200 on at least a part of the front side so that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be visually recognized through the overlapped area, the expectation that the development effect B is executed is more preferable. Can be fueled by.

Further, since the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed on the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position. It can be suitably suggested that the development effect B is executed by displaying the character image Z310 while distracting the player's consciousness.

Further, although the character image Z310 is displayed in a mode of gradually increasing the size, at least the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed in the area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the start of display. It may be displayed so as to overlap with a part of the front side. Further, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestion image so as to overlap with at least a part of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on the front side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific effect display position while displaying the large-sized character image Z310. 1 Erase (hide) without moving to the specific initial display position. Specifically, as an erasure display for emphasizing that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 has been erased, it is hidden in a manner of gradually fading out. After that, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by hiding it in a manner of gradually fading out.

In the feature unit 241SG, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 as the first specific effect while displaying the large-sized character image Z310. An example of a mode in which the image is erased (hidden) without being moved from the display position to the first specific initial display position is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is as shown in FIGS. 11-26 (F). When the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed as the first specific effect while the character image Z310 is being displayed. It may be erased (hidden) without moving from the position to the first specific initial display position.

Further, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is not limited to the one that is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo-movable body display is displayed. While fading out the Z200, the Z200 may be moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position to be displayed and erased (hidden).

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (B), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position at the start timing of the development effect B. Here, when the non-execution of the development effect B is determined in the development effect B type determination process of step 241SGS281, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is first specified as shown in FIGS. 11-27 (C). The reach title image Z51, which will be described later, is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, a mode at the start of display having high transmittance and low visibility) while erasing without moving from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, you will be informed that it will develop into a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 (D), when the execution of the development effect B is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, you will be informed that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white) during the moving display, and the rotation display unit Z207 including the light emitting display units Z208A to Z208E is displayed. It is displayed in a mode of rotating it clockwise from the front view. Further, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position.

Note that the emission display colors of the emission display units Z208A to Z208E in FIGS. 11-27 (D) do not indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit unlike the development suggestion effect, and are displayed on the image display device 5 as an image of a weak reach effect. The emission display color is set according to the color of the effect image Z65 or the like displayed on the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (E), the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, a mode at the start of display having high transmittance and low visibility), and then FIG. 11-. As shown in 27 (F), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-28 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable display mode to the super reach display mode, the reach title indicating the type of the super reach effect and the reach indicating the jackpot expectation degree are shown. The title image Z51 is displayed to notify that the super reach effect has been developed. Next, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an image Z52 in which a friendly character and an enemy character battle (confront)) is started (see FIGS. 11-28 (B)). Then, when the patterns KB-1 and KB-2 are determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282 at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the super reach display mode is set, that is, the operation target is a push button. In the case of 31B, as shown in FIG. 11-28 (C), an operation promotion image Z53 for promoting the pressing operation of the push button 31B is displayed to the player. On the other hand, when the patterns KV-1 and KV-2 are determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, when the operation target is the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 11-28 (D). The operation promotion image Z54 for promoting the pulling operation of the stick controller 31A is displayed on the player.

The timing or push when the push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected during the operation validity period displaying the operation promotion display. If the variable display result is a big hit at the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the push operation of the button 31B or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (E), the mounted movable body 32 Is executed from the origin position to the effect position on the front side of the display area, and the effect image Z55 is displayed. Further, according to the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is set to a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color). Make it emit light.

The effect image Z55 is an effect image including a plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a manner in which the glass is cracked and scattered, and the present invention exemplifies a form similar to the effect image Z71 described later. The effect image is not limited to the above, and may be an effect image having a mode different from that of the effect image Z71. For example, by displaying only a part of the glass in a manner in which only a part of the glass is cracked and scattered as fragments and the remaining part is left, the mounted movable body 32 is displayed overlapping with the effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5. Even in situations where it is difficult to see, the player may take some time to easily understand what happened.

Further, also in the effect image Z55, as in the effect image Z71 described later, at least one of the plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a scattered manner is the mounted movable body 32 arranged on the front side of the image display device 5. By reflecting a part of the display, the positional relationship between the mounted movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer, so that a display with a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

After that, after moving the mounted movable body 32 from the effect position to the origin position, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (F), after displaying the image Z56 showing that the ally character has won the battle with the enemy character. , As shown in FIG. 11-29 (G), the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed to notify the jackpot confirmation. Even if the combination of big hit symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect image Z71 in which the glass is cracked and the glass fragments are scattered in the display area of the image display device 5, and the first pseudo-movable. The body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (B), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the effect movable display units Z110A to Z110D are first produced. The display state is changed to the second effect display state. Further, it is the same as when the mounted movable body 32 is dropped in FIG. 11-29 (E) according to the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. In addition, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light emitting display unit Z108A is made to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color).

Here, the details of the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 described with reference to FIGS. 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B) are shown in FIGS. 11-31. explain.

As shown in FIGS. 11-31 (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 including an image Z71A showing a mode in which the glass is cracked and a plurality of glass fragments are scattered in the display area of the image display device 5. At the same time, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. The effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 so that a part of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be visually recognized below the mounted movable body 32 held at the origin position. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 (B), when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first effect display position, FIG. 11 The amount and movement display speed of the image Z71A showing the glass fragments are increased as compared with the state shown in −31 (A), and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed on the front side of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 (C) and 11-31 (D), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first effect display position, the glass shards are higher than those shown in FIGS. 11-31 (B). The amount and movement display speed of the image Z71A showing the above are further increased, and these images Z71A are displayed on the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100.

In this way, the effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in the first initial display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 according to the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100. While displaying in the display area including the position, the first intermediate display position and the first effect display position, only the image Z71A showing the glass fragments in the effect image Z71 is moved from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. By displaying the image Z71A in a manner scattered around, not only can the image Z71A give a three-dimensional effect, but also the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be made to look as if it were a real structure.

Further, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 11-31 (C), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is seen through any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed on the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100. The first pseudo-movable body display is displayed on any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed visually or displayed on the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 11-31 (D). By reflecting and displaying a part of the Z100, the positional relationship between the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the image Z71A becomes clearer, so that a display with a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 (D), the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, and then displays the effect movable display units Z110A to Z110D as the first effect display. While changing from the state to the second effect display state, the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A are executed at substantially the same cycle.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-32, after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves and displays the effect display unit Z108A to the first effect display position, the effect control CPU 120 displays the light emitting display unit Z108A in the first period ta1 to ta2 ( For example, an effect period in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first effect display position as a blinking display pattern that is displayed for light emission for 33 ms) and then hidden for the second period ta2 to ta3 (for example, 33 ms). While repeating the process a plurality of times over ta1 to ta4, the mounted movable body LED 208 is turned on for the first corresponding period (for example, 30 ms) corresponding to the first period, and then the second corresponding period corresponding to the second period (for example, for example). The blinking pattern of turning off the light for 40 ms) is repeated a plurality of times over the production period ta1 to ta4.

In this way, by executing (synchronizing) the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A at substantially the same cycle, it is possible to more preferably excite the effect. It is difficult to accurately match (synchronize) the time for displaying the light emission display unit Z108A with light emission (for example, 33 ms) and the time for lighting the mounted movable body LED 208 (for example, 30 ms) in the first period ta1 to ta2. Even in such a case, for example, by making the extinguishing period of the mounted movable body LED 208 longer than the lighting period, the difference between the light emitting display of the light emitting display unit Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208 becomes large as time passes. It can be prevented.

Further, during the effect periods ta1 to ta4, a vibration effect may be performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. By doing this, it is possible to make the production even more exciting. The drive of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208.

Returning to FIG. 11-30 (C), the effect control CPU 120 returns the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the second effect display state to the first effect display state, and ends the reduced display of the decorative symbol. After temporarily stopping and displaying in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (D), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed upward, and FIG. 11-30 ( As shown in E), it is erased after being moved to the first effect display position and displayed. Then, the combination of the fixed decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the big hit symbols.

In this way, by executing the effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 to perform the big hit confirmation notification, and then executing the effect of moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Can be more preferably felt by the player.

Returning to FIG. 11-29, a single push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (from the stick controller 31A) during the operation valid period displaying the operation promotion display. If the variable display result is off at the timing when the detection signal) is detected, or when the operation valid period ends without detecting the single push operation of the push button 31B or the single pull operation of the stick controller 31A, FIG. 11-29. As shown in (H), the effect image Z57 is displayed and the effect image Z57 is displayed without executing the movable body effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the effect position on the front side of the display area. As shown in FIG. 11-29 (I), after displaying the image Z58 showing that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (J), the combination of the missed symbols is displayed. A stop display is displayed and an off-set confirmation notification is given. In addition, the combination of the missed symbols is synchronized with the stop display, and the small symbols are stopped and displayed by the combination of the missed symbols.

For example, the operation timing of the push button 31B is different between the case where the push button 31B is operated at the start of the operation valid period and the case where the push button 31B is not operated during the operation valid period. The difference in scale caused by 1. 2. Period of shaking of the decorative design until the design is confirmed. Display period of images Z55 to Z58, 3. It may be absorbed by extending or shortening any of the production periods of the movable body production.

(Example of super reach γ production operation)
Next, an example of the effect of the super reach γ will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-33 to 11-34. 11-33 are diagrams (A) to (F) showing an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect B in the super reach γ. 11-34 are diagrams (A) to (F) showing an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect B in the super reach γ.

In the following, an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect B executed in the normal reach effect in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ will be described, and the flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach effect is the same as that of the super reach β. Therefore, the explanation is omitted. The super reach γ is a variation pattern that is selected only when the gaming state is a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 11-33 (A), when the pattern PYB-1 is determined in the advance notice effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 gives a notice that a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the second specific initial display position and then moved to the second intermediate effect display position (see FIG. 11-33 (B)) to perform a big hit. The advance notice effect B suggesting that the game state is controlled is executed. Further, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed to the second intermediate effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is variable in the decorative symbol display area 5L by being overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L at the second intermediate effect display position. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the displayed decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (C), the effect control CPU 120 erases (non-moves) the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position. indicate.

As shown in FIG. 11-33 (D), when the pattern PYB-2 is determined in the advance notice effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 gives a notice that a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the second specific initial display position and then moved to the second specific effect display position (see FIG. 11-33 (E)) to perform a big hit. The advance notice effect B suggesting that the game state is controlled is executed. Further, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed to the second specific effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is variable in the decorative symbol display area 5C by being overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C at the second specific effect display position. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the displayed decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-33 (F), the effect control CPU 120 erases (non-moves) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position. indicate.

As shown in FIG. 11-34 (A), when the pattern PYB-3 is determined in the advance notice effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 gives a notice that a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position and then moved to the first effect display position (see FIG. 11-34 (B)) to display the jackpot game state. The notice effect B suggesting that the control is performed is executed. Further, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed to the first effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first effect display position, so that the decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the 5C and 5R.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (C), the effect control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the first effect display position to the first initial display position. do.

As shown in FIG. 11-34 (D), when the pattern PYB-4 is determined in the advance notice effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 gives a notice that a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the second initial display position and then moved to the second effect display position (see FIG. 11-34 (E)) to display the jackpot game state. The notice effect B suggesting that the control is performed is executed. Further, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed to the second effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is overlapped on the front side of the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second effect display position, so that the decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the 5C and 5R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (F), the effect control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the second effect display position to the second initial display position. do.

(Pseudo movable body display and movable body)
Next, the pseudo-movable body display and the movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-35 to 11-40. 11-35 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. 11-36 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo-movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. 11-37 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo-movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. 11-38 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo-movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. 11-39 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo-movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 11-40 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo-movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display.

As shown in FIGS. 11-35, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is different from the mounted movable body 32 in form, weight, drive mechanism, etc., as described in FIG. 11-14 (B). Although it is a pseudo movable body display imitating the mounted movable body M100, the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 are both substantially the same position in the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first effect display position. And the effect position of the mounted movable body 32 are both lower than the first initial display position and the origin position, so that the direction of movement from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the mounted movable body 32 are the origin. The direction of movement from the position to the effect position is the common downward direction. That is, both the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are movable downward from the first initial display position and the origin position at the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5.

As described with reference to FIGS. 11-16, the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the effect position from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32. The distance traveled to is longer than L1 (L2> L1).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (A') to (C'), the mounted movable body 32 falls (moves) due to its own weight from the upper origin position to the lower effect position via the intermediate position. While it takes about 300 ms, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (A) to (C), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 has a first effect display from the first initial display position to the first intermediate display position. It takes about 100 ms to move and display the position. That is, the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 has a longer movement display distance and is larger than the movement from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position. Is also fast.

In this way, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 can be mounted and moved as a structure that can move in the same direction (for example, downward) as the first non-mounted movable body M100. When it is possible to move and display from almost the same position as the body 32 in the same direction, the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is the movement display of the mounted movable body 32. By making the movement faster than the movement from the origin position to the production position, it is possible to perform a production with an impact faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 actually mounted, which surprises the player. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (A') (B'), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 has moved from the first origin position to the first effect position below the first origin position. Occasionally, the mechanism unit M100B comes into contact with the upper part of the moving body M106 and stops due to the downward movement being restricted, and at the same time, the vibration generated when the movement is restricted causes a reaction motion (rebound) of a predetermined movement amount. It is said that the display imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100 in which the above is performed.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (A) and 11-36 (B), the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. When the stop display is displayed at the effect display position, the recoil motion display (rebound display) of a specific movement amount is performed.

More specifically, the first non-mounted movable body M100 has a cantilever structure in which only the left side of the effect unit M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when the mechanism unit M100B moves to the first effect position, the mechanism unit M100B moves to the moving body M106. Since it abuts on the upper part of the head and the downward movement is restricted, a recoil motion due to vibration occurs in the mechanism section M100B before the effect section M100A, and then the vibration is transmitted to the effect section M100A to generate a recoil motion.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (B1), when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position, after performing the reaction operation display of the mechanism unit M100B. , As shown in FIG. 11-36 (B2), the recoil motion display of the effect unit M100A is performed. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which is different from the mounted movable body 32, is displayed in a more realistic manner (for example, the display that imitates the mounted movable body 32). It can be moved and displayed in a different mode).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (C') (D'), the mounted movable body 32 has a structure in which the left and right sides of the effect unit 32A are supported by the drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and moves to the effect position. At that time, the mechanism portion 32B abuts on the upper part of the left and right moving bodies 206 to restrict the downward movement, and the vibration generated when the movement is restricted causes a recoil operation of a predetermined movement amount.

Next, the operation mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body in the determination effect will be described.

As described with reference to FIGS. 11-28 to 11-30, the effect control CPU 120 performs a movable body effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position during the execution period (ta0 to ta10) of the determined effect. After executing and performing the big hit confirmation notification, it is possible to execute the pseudo movable body display in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines and starts the effect at the timing ta0, and then the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B within the operation valid period. At the detected timing ta1, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position during the period TL1 (for example, about 300 ms) of the timing ta1 to ta2, and then the recoil operation is performed during the period of the timing ta2 to ta3 (for example, about 700 ms).

After that, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (ascended) from the effect position to the origin position at the timing ta4, and the big hit confirmation notification is performed. Here, the period TL3 (for example, about 1000 ms) of the timing ta4 to ta5 in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the effect position to the origin position is the period of the timing ta1 to ta2 in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position. Longer than TL1 (eg, about 300 ms). In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the effect position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the effect position.

In this way, in the production using the mounted movable body 32 which is a structure, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the production position in response to the operation detection of the player, the game is performed by dropping the mounted movable body 32 faster due to its own weight. While it is possible to give an impact to a person, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the effect position to the origin position, it is possible to prevent the mounted movable body 32 from being damaged by the impact by moving it slowly.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position at the timing ta6 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the jackpot confirmation notification was performed, and the period TL2 (for example, the period ta6 to ta7) of the timing ta6 to ta7. After moving from the first initial display position to the first effect display position (about 100 ms), the recoil motion display is performed during the period from timing ta7 to ta8 (for example, about 900 ms).

After that, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed (raised) from the first effect display position to the first initial display position at the timing ta9, and then the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is erased. Here, during the period TL4 (for example, about 1000 ms) of the timing ta9 to ta10 when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is first. It is longer than the period TL2 (for example, about 100 ms) of the timing ta6 to ta7 for moving and displaying from the initial display position to the first effect display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first effect display position to the first initial display position is such that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display. It is slower than the speed when moving to the position and displaying.

As described above, in the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is more than the movement display from the first effect display position to the first initial display position. By making the mounted movable body 32 the same as the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (B), the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. Comparing L2 (movement display distance L2) with the movement amount L1A per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. That is, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is faster than the movement from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can produce an effect having a faster impact than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, so that the player can be surprised.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (C), the amount of movement of the first reactionary motion display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is larger than the movement amount L11 of the first recoil motion display performed when the mounted movable body 32 is moved and displayed from the origin position to the effect position. Further, the number of recoil movements displayed on the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (for example, 6 times) is larger than the number of recoil movements of the mounted movable body 32 (for example, 4 times). By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can realize a pseudo effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. By displaying the recoil motion generated when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (A) and 11-38 (B), the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the first non-mounted movable body. The movement display distance L2 from the first origin position to the first effect display position of the M100 is the same, and the period TL2 for moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is The period for moving the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first effect position is shorter than the period TL10 (TL2 <TL10). Therefore, the movement amount L2 per unit time (for example, TL2) when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is the first non-mounted movable body M100. It is larger than the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving from one origin position to the first effect position. That is, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is better than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first effect position. Is also fast. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can produce an effect having a faster impact than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, so that the player can be surprised.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (C), the amount of movement of the first reactionary motion display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. In L12, the movement amount L11 of the first reaction motion display performed when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and the first non-mounted movable body M100 is the first from the first origin position. It is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the movement is displayed at the effect position. Further, the number of recoil movements displayed on the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (for example, 6 times) is larger than the number of recoil movements of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 (for example, 4 times). By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 simulates the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. It can be realized, and the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position or when the mounted movable body 32 moves to the effect position is displayed in an exaggerated manner. It is possible to provide a production that leaves a lasting impression on the person.

In the feature unit 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined movement amount in the reaction motion of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific movement amount in the reaction motion display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is The comparison was made between the first recoil motion and the recoil motion display, but it is also possible to compare any of the recoil motions after the second reaction with the recoil motion display, or the total or average movement amount of multiple recoil motions and the recoil motion. It may be compared with the displayed total or average movement amount.

Further, the recoil motion exemplifies a form in which the movable body jumps upward due to the reaction when the movable body is stopped at the second position, but includes deformation or vibration of a predetermined portion of the movable body due to the reaction. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (A), when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the effect position to the origin position, or the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first effect position to the first origin position. In this case, since a drive source such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R or M101 is used, the effect control CPU 120 adjusts the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 or the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the timing tb1 at which the movement is started. The first period to tb2 is increased, the period from timing tb2 to timing tb3 is constant, and the second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4 is decreased. That is, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate until the first period elapses from the start of movement, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate in the second period before the stop position. Stop.

On the other hand, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are moved and displayed is from the timing tb1 at which the movement is started to the timing tb4 at which the movement is stopped, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (B). Since it is constant and the first period for accelerating the movement display and the second period for decelerating it are unnecessary, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed on the first non-mounted movable body M100. It can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the mounted movable body 32.

Next, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-40.

As shown in FIGS. 11-40 (A) to 11-40, when creating a moving image in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, at least the first pseudo is created. The first frame, which is an input image for displaying the movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and the second frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first effect display position. , Will be needed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-40 (A') to (B'), when creating a moving image in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. At a minimum, the first frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 for displaying at the first specific effect display position. A second frame, which is an input image, is required.

As described with reference to FIGS. 11-16, it is a movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position, and is the first specification of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. The movement display distance L3 from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the movement display distance L2 is longer than the movement display distance L3, but the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect. While the time required to move and display to the display position is about 100 ms, the time required to move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is about 100 ms. Since it differs at 800 ms, the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. 1 It is faster than the movement display to the specific effect display position.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the first frame shown in FIGS. 11-40 (A), FIG. 11- It is conceivable to display in the order of the second frame shown in 40 (C), but the frame rate becomes low and the movement becomes rattling and unnatural.

Therefore, between the first frame and the second frame, the interpolation frame 1 shown in FIG. 11-40 (B) is inserted as an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first intermediate display position. The number of frames of the moving image is increased to increase the frame rate, and the movement display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed for each display frame, the first initial display position, By performing the first intermediate display position and the first effect display position in this order, a natural and smooth movement display can be performed.

In this way, even when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed at high speed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, at least one interpolation frame is inserted between the first frame and the second frame. By realizing a natural and smooth movement display, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be quickly moved and displayed without deteriorating the visibility.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first frame shown in FIG. 11-40 (A'), It is conceivable to display the second frame in the order shown in FIG. 11-40 (B'), but the frame rate becomes low and the movement becomes rattling and unnatural.

Therefore, in order to display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at a plurality of first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific effect display position between the first frame and the second frame. As an input image, a plurality of interpolated frames (not shown) are inserted to increase the number of frames of the moving image to increase the frame rate to realize a natural and smooth moving display, and the first specification of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. By performing the movement display from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the order of the first specific initial display position, each first intermediate display position, and the first specific effect display position for each display frame, the second The pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved and displayed at a speed slower than that of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without deteriorating the visibility.

Further, for example, in the advance notice effect B, the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. When PBY-4 to be moved and displayed is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position, the pattern PBY- 1. The ratio controlled to the big hit state (big hit expectation) is different from that when PBY-2 is executed, so that the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state is different between the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second. The pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be recognized by the player due to the difference in the speed of the movement display.

Further, the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. When is executed, the patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position are displayed. Since the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot state (big hit expectation) is higher than when is executed, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be focused on.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopped and displayed at the first effect display position on the image display device 5. An example is an embodiment in which a recoil motion display (rebound display) of a predetermined movement amount is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (D) to (E), an image display is performed. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position and stopped and displayed at the second effect display position on the device 5, a reactionary motion display of a predetermined movement amount ( Bounce display) may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 (A) to (B), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position on the image display device 5. When the stop display is performed at the second intermediate effect display position, or as shown in FIGS. 11-33 (D) to (E), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the second specific initial display position on the image display device 5. When the movement is displayed at the second specific effect display position and the stop display is performed at the second specific effect display position, the reactionary motion display (rebound display) of a predetermined movement amount may be performed.

Further, the recoil operation display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position in the advance notice effect B is a notice. In the effect A, it is preferable that the movement amount is larger than the reaction motion display performed when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, since the amount of movement of the advance notice effect B is larger than that of the advance notice effect A, the movement display can be performed in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the recoil motion display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position after the pattern PBY-3 of the advance notice effect B or the big hit notification of the determined effect is performed. However, it is preferable that the movement amount is larger than the recoil operation display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position in the pattern PBY-4 of the advance notice effect B. .. By doing so, the recoil motion display becomes larger when the movement is displayed downward than when the movement is displayed upward, so that the movement display can be performed in a more realistic manner.

(Action / effect)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect position and the mounted movable body 32 are the origin positions. The direction of movement from to the effect position is a common downward direction, and the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. big.
According to this feature, the player can be surprised by the fact that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can produce an effect having a faster impact than the movement of the mounted movable body 32.
Further, since it is possible to move and display at a speed that is difficult to realize with the mounted movable body 32, or to move and display at a plurality of speeds, it is possible to diversify the effect.

The feature unit 241SG exemplifies a mode in which the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the moving speed of the mounted movable body 32 are compared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first It may be a comparison of the speed between the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the second non-mounted movable body M200. It may be a comparison of speed with movement. That is, if the speed of the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display and the movement of the movable body are compared, the type of the pseudo-movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be arbitrarily changed.

Further, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 in which a recoil operation of a predetermined movement amount is performed when moving from the first origin position to the first effect position. The control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 up and down between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position on the image display device 5. It is possible to move and display in the direction, and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopped and displayed at the first effect display position, a predetermined movement amount is displayed. The reaction motion display (rebound display) is performed, and the movement amount L12 of the first reaction motion display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. Is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved and displayed from the first origin position to the first effect position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can realize a pseudo effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. By displaying the recoil motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The feature unit 241SG exemplifies a form in which the recoil motion display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the recoil motion of the first non-mounted movable body M100 are compared, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a comparison of the reaction amount of the reactionary motion display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 and the reactionary motion of the second non-mounted movable body M200, or the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body. It may be a comparison between the recoil motion display of the display Z200 and the recoil motion of the mounted movable body 32. That is, in the case of comparing the movement amount between the reactionary motion display of the pseudo-movable body display and the reactionary motion of the movable body, the pseudo-movable body display and the type of the movable body to be compared may be arbitrarily changed.

Further, in the variable display period of the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β or the super reach γ, the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. In the case, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit expectation) is higher than when the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed.
According to this feature, the player can be noticed that the development effect A, which is a movable body effect, and the development effect B, which is a pseudo-movable body display effect, are executed.
When the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher than that of the game including the case where the development effect A and the development effect B are controlled to the jackpot gaming state at a rate of 100% when the development effect A and the development effect B are executed.

In addition, it is suggested that the advance notice effect A for notifying the possibility (expectation degree) that the variable display result will be a big hit, the development effect B for notifying that the variable display result will develop into a strong super reach effect, and the development effect B may be executed. It is possible to execute the development suggestion effect, and in the advance notice effect A, after the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first specific effect display is displayed. It is moved from the position to the first specific initial display position and then hidden, and in the development effect B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific effect display position, and then from the first specific effect display position. The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position before the development effect B is executed is hidden without displaying the movement to the first specific initial display position. At this time, the character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position.
According to this feature, in the advance notice effect A, since the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves and displays in the same manner as the movable body as a structure, whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. On the other hand, in the development suggestion effect, the display of the character image Z310 is prioritized over the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in the same manner as the movable body, from the first specific effect display position. Since the display is hidden without returning to the first specific initial display position, the player can pay attention to the suggestion of the execution of the development effect B.

In addition, it is possible to execute a decision effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled by the jackpot game state, and a development effect B that develops into a strong super reach effect and notifies that the decision effect is executed. When the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and then the first specific effect display is displayed. A display area including the first specific effect display position, in which the reach title image Z51 suggesting the execution of the development effect B is hidden without being moved from the position to the first specific initial display position. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the determined effect, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then the display is performed. It is hidden after being moved from the first effect display position to the first initial display position.
According to this feature, before the determination effect is executed, the second display of the suggestive image is prioritized over the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in the same manner as the movable body as a structure. Since it is hidden without returning from the position to the first display position, the player can pay attention to the suggestion of executing the decision effect, while in the decision effect, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is the same as the movable body. Since the movement is displayed in this way, it is possible to pay attention to the notification of the content that is advantageous to the player without giving the player a sense of discomfort.
In the feature unit 241SG, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development effect B (specific effect), and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the determined effect (special effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common pseudo-movable body display may be moved between a specific effect and a special effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position for each display frame, the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the like. And the first effect display position, and in the display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position, a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 ( For example, it is possible to display an effect image Z71) in which the glass is cracked and the image Z71A showing a plurality of glass fragments is scattered.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved and displayed quickly without deteriorating the visibility, and the movement display is emphasized by a specific image to give a suitable impression to the player. Can be attached.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position for each display frame, the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the like. And the first effect display position is performed in this order, and the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specific initial display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. The pattern PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position in the advance notice effect B, which is faster than the movement display from the position to the first specific effect display position. When PBY-4, which is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, is executed, and when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second. The ratio controlled to the big hit state (big hit expectation) is different from that when the patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 that are moved and displayed at the intermediate effect display position are executed.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to which of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed, and the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state is different. The player can be made to recognize the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 by the difference in the speed of the movement display.
In the notice effect B, the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the pattern PBY-3 are moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. A big hit when the pattern PBY-4 to be executed is executed and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is executed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position. The difference in the rate controlled to the state (big hit expectation) is that the rate controlled to the big hit state when the pattern PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-4 is executed in the advance notice B is 100%, and the pattern PBY- When 1 or the pattern PBY-2 is executed, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state is 0%, or when the pattern PBY-1 or the pattern PBY-2 is executed in the advance notice effect B, the jackpot state is controlled. This includes the case where the ratio is 100% and the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state when the pattern PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-4 is executed is 0%.

Further, by making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 a display image having not only the effect display units Z100A and Z200A but also the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B, the movable body can be operated by the drive mechanism. While it is possible to express the body more realistically and realize a movable body display effect similar to the movable body effect, with regard to the movement display, not only the movement display is performed in the same manner as the movement of the movable body, but also the movable body is displayed. Then, by making it possible to move and display a mode that is difficult to realize due to reasons such as complicated mechanism and high cost, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production.

In addition, the feature unit 241SG erases (hides) the movement display in a mode that is difficult to realize with a movable body, without displaying the high-speed movement, the deformed display, and the return display from the effect display position to the initial display position. Although the above is illustrated, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect by realistically expressing the display mode of the pseudo-movable body display and unrealistically displaying the moving display.

In particular, since the pseudo movable body display moved to the effect display position can be hidden or displayed at a desired timing, for example, the movable body as a structure moved to the effect display position is returned to the origin position. At that time, it is possible to avoid deterioration of visibility due to hiding of other production images, and it is possible to start the next production immediately, which has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in production design. Play.

Further, the movement amount L12 of the first reactionary motion display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is the first non-mounted movable body M100. Is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil motion display performed when the movement is displayed from the first origin position to the first effect position, so that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 causes the first non-mounted movable body M100. It is possible to realize a pseudo effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the above, and exaggerate the recoil motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position. By displaying in the above-mentioned manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

Further, since the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position to the effect position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is mounted. Since the moving speed is faster than that of the movable body 32 and the moving distance is long, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

Further, the pseudo movable body display includes the effect display units Z100A and Z200A and the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B, and in the movement display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B are more than the effect display units Z100A and Z200A. By reaching the first effect display position first, the pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Further, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32, so that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is more realistic. It can be moved and displayed in various manners.

Further, the movement period between the origin position and the effect position of the mounted movable body 32 includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases, and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display is included. Since the period does not include the first period and the second period, the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, and then executes the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A at substantially the same cycle. , The player can be attracted to the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed to the first effect display position.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not emit light from the light emitting display unit Z108A when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed, so that the incomplete first pseudo movable body display Z100 during the movement display can be seen. By not standing up, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, and then executes the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display unit Z108A at substantially the same cycle. , The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position, and is second in the advance notice effect A. The pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is secondly specified from the second specific initial display position in the advance notice effect B. By moving to the effect display position and displaying differently from the right direction, one pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from multiple display positions, so the player can create an unexpected effect that is difficult to achieve with a movable body. Can be provided to.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. By being able to move and display in a direction different from that of the above, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

(Modification 1)
Next, a modification 1 of the feature portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-41. 11-41 is a diagram showing modifications 1 of the feature portion 241SG in FIGS. 11-41.

In the feature unit 241SG, as described with reference to FIGS. 11-25, in the advance notice effect A, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and then displayed. An example is shown in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position as the development effect A after moving and displaying from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and then erasing.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (D), the movable range of the mounted movable body 32 and a part of the movable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, that is, the mounted movable body is moved to the effect position. When the movable body 32 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position overlap, the effect control CPU 120 moves the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position and the second pseudo. When the movement display of the movable body display Z200 to the first specific effect display position is executed in a common period, the mounted movable body 32 overlaps on the front side of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is overlapped. Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it becomes easy to understand that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is not a structure but a display body, and the interest of the production is reduced.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (A), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. After displaying (see FIG. 11-41 (B)), by erasing without moving from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 11-41 (C)), FIG. 11 As shown in −41 (D), the mounted movable body 32 moved from the origin position to the effect position as the development effect A may be prevented from overlapping with the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

(Modification 2)
Next, a modification 2 of the feature portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-42. 11-42 is a diagram showing the second modification of the feature portion 241SG in FIGS. 11-42.

In the feature unit 241SG, the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position and the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position are common. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the mounted movable body 401 as the second modification is in the first position and below the first position. The direction of movement between the second position and the direction in which the pseudo-movable body display Z402 as a modification 2 moves and displays between the first display position and the second display position above the first display position. , Is in a common direction (for example, in the vertical direction), the movement display from the first display position to the second display position of the pseudo movable body display Z402 is the second from the first position of the mounted movable body 401. It should be faster than moving to a position.

Further, the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position (downward) and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position (upward direction). And may be in different directions.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are not executed in a common period, but the present invention. Is not limited to this, and as in the second modification, by executing the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 in a common period, the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body 401 are simulated. It may be possible to execute an effect using the movable body display Z402.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-42, the mounted movable body 401 as the second modification is a structure in which the characters "go" are displayed, and is the first in the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5. It is possible to move between one position and a second position below the first position, and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R as the second modification are the first predetermined positions on the left and right sides of the display area of the image display device 5. And the second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 as the second modification is capable of displaying the characters of "body" and is an image display device. It is possible to move and display between the first display position at the bottom of the display area 5 and the second display position above the first display position. The detailed drive mechanism of the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R will not be illustrated or described.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo movable body display Z402 in the above-mentioned advance notice effects A, B, development effects A, B, etc., first, the figure. As shown in 11-42 (A), the pseudo-movable body display is shown in FIG. 11-42 (B) with the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R waiting at the first position. After the Z402 is displayed at the first display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position as shown in FIG. 11-42 (C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 is moved from the first position to the second position. Then, when the mounted movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 on the pseudo movable body display Z 402 so that the mounted movable body 401 does not overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves to the first display position and displays, the mounted movable body 401 pseudo. Closest to the movable body display Z402, the character "coalescence" is in a recognizable pseudo-coalescence state. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (F), the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is displayed while maintaining the pseudo-union state of the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402. By moving and displaying the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R to the second predetermined position, it is notified that the effect is developed due to the success of the pseudo-coalescence.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the first position and the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is set as the first display position. Is moved and displayed in a mode in which the image is divided into different first specific display positions (for example, positions on the left and right sides), and then erased by frame-out or fade-out to the left and right of the screen.

On the other hand, when it is decided to notify that the pseudo-union is not successful and the effect does not develop, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 is moved downward and pseudo-movable. In the middle of displaying the downward movement of the body display Z402, the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 is stopped while decelerating, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is displayed in such a manner that the upper part is destroyed. Notify that the pseudo-coalescence does not succeed and the production does not develop. As described above, in the pseudo-movable body display Z402, it is possible to easily realize an effect of an aspect that is difficult to realize with a movable body as a structure.

(Modification 3)
Next, a modification 3 of the feature portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-43. 11-43 are views (A) to (C) showing a modification 3 of the feature portion 241SG.

In the feature unit 241SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a mode in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved and displayed between the first display position and the second display position. The present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to one capable of reciprocating movement display in one direction such as a vertical direction or a horizontal direction. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. 11-43 ( A) As shown in (B), after the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (C), the first It may be possible to move and display in a direction different from the direction of moving and displaying from the initial display position to the first effect display position.

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (C), what is a linear movement display in one direction, such as displaying only the effect display unit Z200A vertically around a rotation axis facing the left-right direction at the first effect display position? It is preferable to enable various modes of movement display, such as different rotational movement displays and movement displays in a mode of moving toward another direction (for example, a depth direction) different from one direction. By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

Although the feature portion 241SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and there are changes and additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Is also included in the present invention.

(Explanation of deformation and application)
The feature unit 241SG exemplifies a form in which the mounted movable body 32 is applied as a movable body mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of devices other than the mounted movable body 32 are used. The movable body may be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the frame-side movable body provided on the game board 2 is not limited to the board-side movable body, and the game machine frame 3 or the frame-side movable body provided on the opening / closing door that can open and close the game machine frame 3 may be used. The pseudo-movable body display that imitates the side movable body may be movable and displayable. Further, as the board-side movable body, it may be possible to display a pseudo movable body display that imitates a variable winning device provided in connection with the game.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, a mode in which the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are applied as movable bodies scheduled to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but not mounted is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are scheduled to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, but they are not mounted. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are erased, a mode in which the display is gradually faded out is exemplified. The effect image that emphasizes the erasure may be displayed, and the erasure may be performed by a method other than these.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, the movement distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect display position is the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position. It is shorter than that, and when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed, a common effect image Z71 in which the glass is cracked and glass fragments are scattered is displayed, and is common. Although the form of outputting the effect sound is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position is set as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100. An effect image that is longer than the moving display distance L2 from the initial display position to the first effect display position and has different modes depending on whether the mounted movable body 32 moves or the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. It may be displayed and a different sound effect may be output. By doing so, it is possible to make the movement of the mounted movable body 32 stand out by using the movement display of the pseudo movable body display.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, in the variable display period of the super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed up to twice as the development effect A and the effect, and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is performed. , The notice effect B and the determined effect can be executed up to 2 times, and the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be executed up to 4 times of the advance notice effect A, the advance notice effect B, the development suggestion effect, and the development effect B. Although a certain form has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times the movement of the movable body or the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display is executed may be performed a number of times other than the above-mentioned number of times.

Further, when the movable body can be moved the first time in one variable display period, the pseudo-movable body display can be moved a second time more than the first time in one variable display period. preferable. By doing so, instead of increasing the chances of executing the movable body effect too much and lowering the jackpot expectation, the chances of executing the pseudo-movable body display are increased, so that the effect is reduced. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

In addition to the above-mentioned plurality of effects, for example, the pseudo movable body display may be moved and displayed at the time of symbol promotion in the re-lottery after the big hit confirmation notification or during the big hit middle effect. The movable body display may be a pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Further, the advance notice effect A is applied as a special suggestion effect suggesting that the control is performed in an advantageous state, the development effect B is applied as a notification effect for notifying the content advantageous to the player, and the notification effect is executed. The development suggestion effect is applied as a suggestion predetermined effect, the determined effect is applied as a special effect notifying that the special effect is controlled to an advantageous state, and it is suggested that the special effect is executed before the special effect is executed. Although the embodiment in which the notice effect B is applied is exemplified as the specific effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and various effects other than the above can be applied. Further, although these various effects can be executed in the variable display period of one super reach, the effects may be executed over a plurality of variable display periods.

In addition, the contents that are advantageous for the player are, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, pseudo-ream, big hit, small hit, reach, hold ream, chance-up effect, pre-reading notice effect, time reduction loss, ceiling time reduction control described later, etc. , Variable display results, controls and effects may be included. Further, in the slot machine, chance zone (CZ) winning, assist time (AT) winning, replay time (RT) winning, bonus winning and the like may be included.

Further, when the feature unit 241SG starts displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, the game board 2 and the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 may be used. By reducing or turning off the brightness, the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is conspicuous, while the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed. When erasing, the game for the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is performed by increasing or lighting the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. It can distract the person's consciousness.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 can be adjusted by the player's operation, while the first pseudo movable body display Z100. It is preferable that the light amount adjustment of the light emission display units Z208A to Z208E of the light emission display unit Z108A and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 cannot be performed by the player's operation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo-movable body display from being spoiled or inconspicuous.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position is hidden in the development suggestion effect, the display area including the first specific effect display position is displayed. Although the embodiment in which the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed as the notification-related image is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification-related image is an image related to the notification effect (for example, development effect B). If there is, an image other than the character image (for example, an image imitating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) may be used.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, in the development effect B, as a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the determined effect, a form in which the reach title image Z51 is displayed in the mode at the start of display is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. An image other than the reach title image (for example, a character image appearing in a strong super reach effect or a determined effect) may be used as long as the suggested image suggests the execution of the determined effect. ..

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, an embodiment in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be displayed in different periods is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, a plurality of pseudo movable body displays may be moved and displayed in a common period. In this case, for example, the movable displayable range of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the movable displayable range of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 overlaps in the overlapping area. And the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, one of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed on the display layer on the front side of the other, so that they can be displayed on each other. Since it is possible to make people aware of the front-back positional relationship, it is possible to realize a more realistic production.

Further, in the feature unit 241SG, it is considered that the mechanism display units Z100B and Z200B of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are cut off at the edge of the display area of the image display device 5 and displayed. Then, the mounted movable body, the center decorative frame, or the like may be arranged so as to cover the portion where the display of the mechanism display unit of the pseudo movable body display is started in the display area of the image display device 5, or the mounted movable body may be movable. It may be difficult to visually recognize the portion where the display of the mechanism display unit of the pseudo-movable body display is started by moving the body.

Further, although the feature unit 241SG exemplifies a mode in which the display result of the variable display includes the “missing time reduction”, the CPU 103 describes a predetermined condition (for example, a flag stored in the RAM 102 in the initialization process of step S6). Variable display has been performed a specified number of times (for example, 900 times) from the time when the counter, clear processing to clear the buffer, control to the big hit game state, or the display result is set to be out of time) is established. ) Based on what has been done, it may be possible to execute the ceiling time reduction control that controls the time reduction state without going through the jackpot game state. The internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state by the ceiling time reduction control (for example, 900 times) is the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state (for example, 100 times). May be different.

When the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction control is executed and the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the above-mentioned specified number of times without satisfying the above-mentioned predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 uses the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second. Pseudo-movable body display It may be possible to execute a moving display of a pseudo-movable body display such as Z200. In this way, it may be possible to execute the movement display of the pseudo movable body display in each notification such as the notification of the big hit, the notification of the loss of time reduction, the notification of the ceiling time reduction control, and the type and movement display of the pseudo movable body display in each notification. The mode may be different.

Further, the feature unit 241SG exemplifies a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed as a notification of a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a small hit or a time saving. When it becomes out of order or when the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction control is executed, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is used to notify the small hit or the time reduction and the ceiling time reduction control. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit may be notified by moving the mounted movable body 32.

In addition, depending on whether the display result of the variable display is a small hit or a missed time reduction, or if the display result of the variable display is a big hit, a common type of pseudo-movable body display is used for notification, but the movement display is used. The embodiments may be different. In addition, depending on the case where the display result of the variable display is a small hit or the time reduction is off, and the case where the display result of the variable display is a big hit, the pseudo-movable body display is used to notify, but the type of the pseudo-movable body display is It may be different.

Further, the feature unit 241SG exemplifies a form in which a so-called one type of pachinko gaming machine capable of being controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game is applied as a pachinko gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be a so-called type 1 or 2 type of gaming machine that can be controlled to a big hit gaming state by generating a V prize triggered by a small hit in a short time state after the big hit game is completed, and the game playability can be changed in various ways. be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like are exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is used for gaming. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside the machine and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given according to the prize are added, while the number of game balls used for the game is The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified, and the variable display result is derived from the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines where winning is possible.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least a machine that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is another gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position,
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position,
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
A pseudo-movable body display effect for moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and
A movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, and
Is feasible and
When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed.
Moreover,
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIG. 12-5) on which an image based on the image data can be arranged. An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 12-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 12-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are a portion drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority), and a gaming machine.
According to this feature, the player can be noticed that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are executed. Furthermore, since a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect. Compared with the case where the image data of these displacement specific images is stored exclusively, the specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.

In other words, the player pays attention to the effect in the expectation that the movable body effect is executed when the pseudo-movable body display effect is executed, so that the interest of the effect can be improved and the amount of data is small. It is possible to execute the specific effect, and it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from being lowered when the specific effect is executed. That is, when installed in the game field, the instruction of the direction in which the game ball should be launched in an advantageous state is easy for the player to understand, and the specific effect is executed with a small amount of data without deteriorating the visibility of the display image of the game-related information. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be used.

Further, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design, and it is possible to execute a specific effect with a small amount of data and prevent the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from being deteriorated. As an example, a gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIG. 12-5) on which an image based on the image data can be arranged. An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 12-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 12-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are a portion drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority), and a gaming machine. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another example of the form.

(Example of other forms)

(Explanation of Feature Unit 006SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature unit 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a design) and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIG. 12-5) on which an image based on the image data can be arranged. An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIGS. 12-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 12-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG, a reach suggestion in the modification 006SG-1). It is possible to execute an effect, a revival effect in the modified example 006SG-2, a look-ahead notice effect in the modified example 006SG-3, a promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6). be,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, only the image data for displaying the specific image in the display area and the display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image are used, and the display position of the specific image is changed from the first position to the first position. Since the specific effect can be executed by displacing it at two positions, the amount of data stored in the storage means for executing the specific effect can be suppressed as compared with the case where the specific effect is executed using the dedicated image data. ..

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the specific effect is executed, the display position of the game-related information is not displaced together with at least a part of the specific image, so that the game-related information is difficult for the player to see when the specific effect is executed. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

The gaming machine of the third embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area overlapping the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is an image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion effect. Duplicate display),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become the displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed overlapping with the displacement specific image, so that the player feels uncomfortable. You can recognize game-related information without any problem.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in a region that does not overlap with the displacement specific image in the display region (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I is a left region 006SG005L, a middle region 006SG005C, and a right region during the development suggestion effect. The part displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with each image of the area 006SG005R),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become the displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displacement specific image, so that the player can accurately perform the game. Can recognize game-related information.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the second and fourth embodiments.
A game identification information variable display executing means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 3) capable of executing variable display of game identification information (for example, special symbol) is provided. ,
The effect executing means is
In the first area in the display area, it is possible to execute the variable display of the effect identification information according to the variable display of the game identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the image display device 5 In the central part of the display area, the part where variable display of decorative symbols can be executed according to the variable display of special symbols),
In a second area in the display area, which is different from the first area and smaller than the first area, it is possible to execute variable display of reduced identification information according to variable display of the game identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5, a portion capable of performing variable display of a small symbol according to variable display of a special symbol).
The display image of the effect identification information is arranged in the specific display layer, and the visual state is changed from the first visual state to the second visual state, which is less visible to the player than the first visual state, according to the execution of the specific effect. The decorative symbol changes to a state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 and 12-23, the decorative symbol is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 when the development suggestion effect is executed. The part where visibility is reduced by moving upward or downward from the center of the display area),
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged in the special display layer, and the visual state does not change from the first visual state according to the execution of the specific effect (for example, FIGS. 12-21 and 12-23 are shown. As described above, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbols, they do not move from the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5 when the development suggestion effect is executed, so that the visibility does not deteriorate. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by changing the visual state of the identification information for the effect from the first visual state to the second visual state by the execution of the specific effect, and the effect is reduced by the execution of the specific effect. Since the visual recognition state of the identification information does not change from the first visual recognition state, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the reduced identification information even during the execution of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, the upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 12-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, the lower area shown in FIG. 12-31). 006SG005B), including
The effect executing means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed over the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (C), the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are displayed. It is possible to display an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displacement specific image (for example, a portion for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image). As shown in 12-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
When the relative position between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is displaced, the first specific display area and the first specific display area are located at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area. 2 An effect image different from the image displayed in the specific display area (for example, the cutting effect image 006SG005S shown in FIGS. 12-31) is displayed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player more effectively recognize the displacement of the specific image to the second position as the specific effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.
The effect executing means can displace the first specific display area in the first direction as a displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific effect, and the second specific can be used. The display area can be displaced toward the second direction opposite to the first direction (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (D), the upper area 006SG005T is on the right side and the lower area 006SG005B is on the left side. A portion to be moved toward the direction, or a portion to move the upper region 006SG005T upward and the lower region 006SG005B downward as shown in FIG. 12-31 (E)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as a specific effect, the displacement of the specific image to the second position is the second direction opposite to the displacement of the first specific display area in the first direction and the first direction of the second specific display area. By executing it as a displacement in the direction, the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth or seventh embodiment.
The displacement amount of the first specific display area and the displacement amount of the second specific display area in the specific effect are different (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-3, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are used as pre-reading notice effects. When the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions, the movement amount (displacement amount) of the upper region 006SG005B is different).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixth and eighth embodiments.
The effect image is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is a decoration. The part that is drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the design or background image),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the display position of the specific image is displaced as a specific effect, the display position of the effect image is not displaced. Therefore, the displacement of the display position of the specific image is made more conspicuous by comparing these specific images with the effect image. It is possible to further improve the effect of a specific effect.

The gaming machine of the tenth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixth to nine embodiments.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
The effect executing means can display the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, a portion capable of displaying the crack effect image 006SG005H in two colors of blue and red, and a portion thereof. As shown in FIGS. 12-33, the part where the cutting effect image 006SG005S can be displayed in three colors of blue, green, and red).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which display mode the effect image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed in any color. The part where the jackpot expectation is different depending on the color, or the part where the jackpot expectation is different depending on which color the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed as shown in FIGS. 12-33).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the eleventh form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to tenth forms.
The specific effect is an effect in which the specific image changes stepwise (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, it is displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG. The part where the amount of movement of the image is gradually increased, and as shown in FIGS. 12-27, the decorative design inside is gradually expanded in the revival production of the modified example 006SG-2. As shown in Fig. 12-35, the part where the amount of movement of the fragments constituting the decorative pattern gradually increases, the distortion of the decorative pattern and the background image is gradually large in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5. The part that goes to),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by changing the specific image step by step.

The gaming machine of the form 12 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 11.
The specific effect is an effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position toward the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the development suggestion of the feature unit 006SG. In the production, the amount of movement of the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R gradually moves upward or downward from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 12-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, the fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside are stepwise from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the peripheral edge portion of the display area. The moving part, the part where the decorative pattern and the background image are gradually distorted toward the left side in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the displacement from the first position to the second position of the specific image in the specific effect can be emphasized, so that the effect of the effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment.
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image pieces (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern inside is composed of a plurality of fragments as shown in FIGS. 12-28).
The specific effect is an effect in which the number of the displayed image pieces is gradually increased (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-2, a plurality of fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside are the progress of the revival effect. The part that gradually increases according to),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to strongly impress the player with a specific effect by the visual effect that the image pieces gradually increase.

The gaming machine of the form 14 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 11.
The specific effect is an effect in which the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the display area is gradually increased (for example, in the hot water shown in FIG. 1-28, in the revival effect, the image display device 5 is used. The part where the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern in the display area gradually increases),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the ratio of the area where the specific image is displayed to the display area is gradually increased, so that the player can be more effectively attracted to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 11 to 14.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
The storage means can store a plurality of display position displacement information having different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion in which a plurality of displacement image data are stored in the CGROM 206).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which display position displacement information the specific image is displaced from (for example, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the left region 006SG005L, While the displacement image data for sliding the images of the middle area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R to the third stage is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area are used. Since the displacement image data for sliding the image of 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage is used, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion effect. Part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the displacement mode of the specific image in the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 16th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 11th to 15th embodiments.
The plurality of display position displacement information is the first display position change information in which the specific image changes from the first aspect to the second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, super reach. In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of, the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are displacement image data for sliding movement to the third stage), and the specific image is from the first aspect to the first aspect. The second display position change information that does not change in two modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, in the variable display with the normal reach displacement pattern, the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are the first stage. Or data for displacement image for sliding to the second stage), including
The first display position change information and the second display position change information have a common change portion in which the image processing means changes the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, FIG. As shown in 12-21 and FIG. 12-22, when the image for the displacement image in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide and move to the third stage is used, and the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, In the case of using the displacement image data in which the image of the right region 006SG005R slides to the first stage, the portion where the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage is common. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage. When the displacement image data is used, the part where the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage is common).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first aspect to the second aspect as the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the 17th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 16th forms.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed over the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (C), the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are displayed. It is possible to display an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displacement specific image (for example, a portion for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image). As shown in 12-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
After the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, shown in FIGS. 12-31 (D) and 12-31 (E)). (A portion in which the upper region 006SG005T is moved to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B is moved to the left side, and then the boundary portion between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is moved upward and downward, respectively).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, after the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, so that the effect of the specific effect can be enhanced. Can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 18th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 17th embodiment.
The boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is different from at least one display area among the plurality of display areas including the first specific display area and the second specific display area. Displaceable in the direction (eg, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (D) and 12-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left, but the upper part. The boundary between the area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is a part that moves in the vertical direction),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the displacement of the plurality of display areas and the displacement of the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.

The gaming machine of the form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 1 to 18.
At least in the specific display layer, the image can be arranged over the area corresponding to the display area and the area outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-39, the promotion effect is executed. At the time, the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and a part of the background image is outside the display area of the image display device 5. Placement part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when a displacement specific image is displayed in the display area as a specific effect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an inappropriate display is performed in the display area.
In the modified example 006SG-5 of the present invention, when the promotion effect (specific effect) is executed, the displacement target image is enlarged so that the left-right width dimension is longer than the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of creating an image for promotion effect by applying a displacement image to the whole, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range to which the displacement image is applied among the displacement target images is limited to this. It is not necessary to displace only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

The gaming machine of the form 20 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 19.
The effect executing means can enlarge the image displayed in the display area during the period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, depending on the progress of the promotion effect). The part that gradually enlarges the decorative pattern drawn / placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / placed in the layer 3 image drawing area),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display in the display area in the process of displaying the displacement specific image while maintaining the effect of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the 21st form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means displays the specific image over the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and the first specific display area and the second specific image are displayed as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose position is displaced relative to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , The upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left side).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example,). As shown in the modification 006SG-3, the part where the image manually displayed in the upper region 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B are different),.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the specific effect can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being deteriorated.

The gaming machine of the 22nd form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means displays the specific image over the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and the first specific display area and the second specific image are displayed as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose position is displaced relative to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , The upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left side).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, at least a part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area is displayed. It is the same (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side). At least part of the common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to give unexpectedness to a specific effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to the form 21 or the form 22.
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is the first specific display when the displacement specific image is displayed. In the display area of the image display device 5, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are not displayed in the area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-3, at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect). A part of the image displayed over is not displayed as an image displayed over the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to further improve the production interest of a specific production.

The gaming machine of the 24th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 23rd forms.
The display means can display a stereoscopic image composed of an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye in the display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-44, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5'. Is a part where a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image) can be displayed),
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect for displaying the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-45 (B), a portion where the notice effect during variable display can be displayed on the stereoscopic image).
When the specific effect is executed, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-45 (D), when the development suggestion effect is executed, the development is performed. The part where the image displayed as a suggestion effect is displayed as a stereoscopic image),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's interest can be improved by the stereoscopic effect, and the displacement specific image is not displayed as the stereoscopic image in the specific effect, so that the specific effect can be suitably carried out.

The gaming machine of the form 25 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 24.
The image for the right eye and the image for the left eye are arranged in a stereoscopic display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the specific effect is executed, the stereoscopic effect can be suitably executed.

The gaming machine of the 26th form is the gaming machine according to the 24th or 25th form.
The effect executing means can execute the stereoscopic effect as an introduction effect of the specific effect in a period before the execution period of the specific effect during variable display.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the specific effect is executed by executing the stereoscopic effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, the effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, and the like. In the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 operates according to the program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives the effect control command via the input circuit 260. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control of the image display device 5 such as generation of an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 on the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 based on the effect control command. Perform the processing to make it.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, the display control unit 123 includes characters (also referred to as image data such as people, animals, characters, figures, symbols, and CG data), decorative patterns, and backgrounds as image element data used as sprite images. Image, 1st special figure reserved storage number as game-related information in this feature unit 006SG 1st reserved storage display area 006SG005D and 2nd special figure reserved storage number to be identifiable and displayed 2nd reserved storage Displayed together with CGROM205 for storing data such as the first interface image 006SG005I for displaying the display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol, and SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area. Configure the control circuit.

The effect control CPU 120 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which the image data is stored according to the received effect control command to the display control unit 123. The CGROM 205 stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, image data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative patterns), and a background image. It is a ROM for storing. The CGROM 205 in the feature unit 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for shifting the positions of the pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying the displacement target image to be described later. There is. The display control unit 123 reads image data from the CGROM 205 in response to a command from the effect control CPU 120. Then, the display control unit 123 executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 is a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, attributes (parameters used when drawing a character, the drawing order of the character, the number of colors, the enlargement / reduction ratio, and the like. The attribute register 203 that stores the data that specifies the palette number, coordinates, etc.), the drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of the image to the drawing area described later in the VRAM area, and the CG data stored in the CGROM 205 are stored in the VRAM area. Data transfer control unit 211 that controls transfer, video signals for displaying image data stored in the display image creation area described later in the VRAM area (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) It is an integrated circuit equipped with a display control unit 213 that outputs a signal and a synchronization signal, a DA converter 214 that converts a video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal, and outputs the data to the image display device 5.

A system bus and a CG bus are provided inside the display control unit 123, and the system bus and the CG bus are connected to the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 201, and an infrared camera 60 is connected to the system bus. The image processing DSP 264 is connected. Further, the CG bus is connected to the CGROM 205 via the CG bus interface 204. The system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and the attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, so that the effect control CPU 120 can access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

Further, the drawing control unit 206, the data transfer control unit 211, and the display control unit 213 are connected to the system bus so that the system register 202 can be accessed. Further, the drawing control unit 206 and the data transfer control unit 211 are connected to the CG bus so that the CGROM 205 and the attribute register 203 can be accessed.

Further, a VRAM bus is further provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via the VRAM bus interface 209. A drawing control unit 206, a data transfer control unit 211, and a display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus so that the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

In the system register 202, a system control register for storing instructions such as initial setting, drawing, and data transfer, an interrupt control register for storing interrupt signal output instructions described later, a drawing area in the VRAM area, and arrangement of palette data. A drawing register for storing an area and the like, a data transfer register for storing a transfer source address and a transfer destination address at the time of data transfer, a display register for storing a display image creation area in the VRAM area, and the like are allocated.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the effect control CPU 120 at each start of the V blank (cycle for updating the image), and outputs various other interrupt signals to the effect control CPU 120. do.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing for outputting the image data of the display image creation area of the VRAM area designated by the display register as a video signal. In the feature unit 006SG, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, the area allocated as the drawing area is drawn in a certain V blank, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. In the meantime, drawing is performed in the other area.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (a) and 12-2 (b), in the feature unit 006SG, an image for displaying on the image display device 5 by superimposing (combining) a plurality of layers. Is being generated. In the VRAM area, a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each of these layers and an image drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (combined) and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area for generating an image for the purpose is arranged (see FIG. 12-5). It should be noted that each layer has the concept of upper, middle, and lower layers, and the higher the image, the higher the display priority is set in the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the higher the display priority in the image display device 5. Is set low.

As shown in FIGS. 12-5 (A) and 12-5 (B), a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing / arranging an image of layer 1 and an image of layer 2 are drawn / arranged in the VRAM area. A layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 3 image are arranged. Further, a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image, which will be described later, and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

In the displacement image creation area, an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area is created as a displacement target image. This is an area for creating a displacement image by applying a displacement image described later to the displacement target image.

In the display image creation area, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed ( Display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image (combined) or an image in which an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area are superimposed (combined). This is the area to be created as an image.

The image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image having the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), and the image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area is an image display. An image having a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5 and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are the most in the image display device 5. Each image has a low display priority (display priority: low).

That is, layer 1 is an upper layer having the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer having an image display priority lower than layer 1, and layer 3 is a lower layer having the lowest image display priority. It is a layer.

As shown in FIGS. 12-2 (b) and 12-5 (B), in the layer 1 image drawing area, the first special figure reserved storage number is identifiablely displayed in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U for identifiable display of the number of reserved storages, and in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5. This is a drawing area for drawing these images in order to display the second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol whose display area is smaller than the decorative symbol.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in order to execute variable display of the decorative symbols in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing the background image in order to display the background image in the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In the feature unit 006SG, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area. By superimposing each of the images drawn and arranged in (the image of the layer 3), it is possible to generate an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) have the highest display priority, and thus are the highest in the image display device 5. Since the image (decorative pattern) displayed as the upper layer image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image display device 5 The image (background image) displayed in the middle layer image and drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is displayed as a low layer image in the image display device 5 because the display priority is set to the lowest.

The image drawn / arranged in each image drawing area in the feature unit 006SG has a transparency of 0% because the upper layer image makes the overlapping portion of the lower layer image invisible to the player when superimposed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transparency of the image drawn / arranged in each image drawing area is set to be higher than 0% depending on the situation, and the image display device 5 An image that is transparently displayed in the display area of the above or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

Next, a displacement method of the displacement target image in the feature unit 006SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), a plurality of pixels having a red component value (R value) and a green component value (G value) are arranged in the displacement image applied to the displacement target image. These R value and G value each take a value in the range of 1 to 256.

Explaining the pixel A of one of these a plurality of pixels as an example, the display control unit 123 is in the displacement target image according to the values of the R value and the G value of the pixel A from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image. The position of the pixel X to be displaced is specified from. Specifically, if the R value of the pixel A is 1 to 127, the display control unit 123 moves from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image toward the minus direction (left direction) of the X axis. Is specified as the coordinates (position) of the pixel X in the X-axis direction, and if the R value of the pixel A is 129 to 256, the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is in the plus direction (right direction) of the X-axis. The position moved toward the pixel X is specified as the coordinates in the X-axis direction of the pixel X. The amount of movement in the X-axis direction from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is a difference from 128, which is the median value of the R value.

Further, if the G value of the pixel A is 1 to 127, the position moved in the negative direction (downward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is the coordinate of the pixel X in the Y axis direction. If the G value of the pixel A is 129 to 256, the position moved from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image toward the plus direction (upward) of the Y axis is the Y-axis direction of the pixel X. Specify as the coordinates (position) of. The amount of movement in the Y-axis direction from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is a difference from 128, which is the median value of the G value.

Then, after the position of the pixel X in the displacement target image is specified, the pixel X is designated as a pixel to be displayed at the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image. That is, the pixel X is displaced to the position corresponding to the pixel A. That is, in the present feature unit 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and the G value of the pixel A, any pixel X can be displaced to the position corresponding to the pixel A, and the R value and the G of the pixel A can be displaced. By adjusting the values to the same value, it is possible to displace a specific pixel X, which is the same amount away from the position corresponding to the pixel A, to the position corresponding to the pixel A.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process for a plurality of pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), the displacement image has a plurality of regions (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement) in which the R value and the G value are different from each other. Image d) is configured, and each region is applied to the displacement target image to generate a displacement image.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (A) to 12-4 (C), the R value is 128 and the G value is any one of 1 to 127 as the region constituting the displacement image. A displacement image a, an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 129 to 256, a displacement image b, an R value of any one of 1 to 127, and a G value of 128. A displacement image c, an image d for displacement having an R value of any one of 129 to 256 and a G value of 128 is provided, and an image of a triple circle is used as a displacement target image.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (D), for the displacement image a, in the displacement target image, the range moved downward by the difference of the G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image a is the displacement image. Specify in the display range of. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (E), for the displacement image b, in the displacement target image, the range moved above the difference of the G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image b is displayed in the displacement image. Specify in the range. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (F), for the displacement image c, in the displacement target image, the range moved to the left by the difference of the R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image c is the displacement image. Specify in the display range. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (G), for the displacement image d, in the displacement target image, the position moved to the right by the difference of the R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image d is the displacement image. Specify in the display range.

As described above, the range specified from the displacement target image by the R and G values of the displacement image a, the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d is set as the displacement image a, the displacement image b, and the displacement. By displacing to the positions of the image c and the displacement image d, a displacement image as shown in FIG. 12-4 (H) is generated.

In this feature unit 006SG, the displacement image a, the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d are set to either the R value or the G value as a fixed value, so that the displacement image a, Although the boundaries of the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d are clearly separated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the displacement image a, the displacement image b, and the displacement image d are used. It is also possible to generate an image such as a gradation as a displacement image by gradually making the R value and the G value of the pixels near the boundaries of the image c and the displacement image d different from each other.

FIG. 12-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 006SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 12-6 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-6 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing" or "big hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state described later corresponds to. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The commands shown in FIG. 12-6 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 12-7, in the feature unit 006SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software to obtain random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a part may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 12-8 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 006SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table to be played.

In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 006SG, the special figure display result determination table is characterized according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state. It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 006SG, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 006SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 006SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

FIG. 12-9 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 006SG is based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 006SG will be described with reference to FIG. 12-9 (B). In the feature unit 006SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" to be transferred and a "non-probability variation jackpot" to be executed only for the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state and to transition to the low probability variation high base state are set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big hit game state by "probability change big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change to the first state advantageous to the player. .. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. May be called.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A to the probabilistic jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variation jackpot A to the probability variation jackpot C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is in the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously without intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 006SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-9 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Due to the high opening control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided and the game interest is reduced. It is designed to prevent this.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-9 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination values for the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 12-10 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG. In this feature unit 006SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 006SG is provided with one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, two types of fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two types of super reach fluctuation patterns are provided. The above or only one type may be provided.

The super reach fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α, and the super reach β. As the fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a big hit is provided.

As shown in FIG. 12-10, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 006SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this feature unit 006SG, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern are set. The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In particular, the special map fluctuation time of the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach α fluctuation pattern. That is, the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set so that the jackpot expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” is higher than that of the super reach α fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined by using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random values for determining the variation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

The normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in the feature unit 006 are displayed in a variable manner. It is also a fluctuation pattern that executes a development suggestion effect to the reach effect of super reach after the reach is established. In the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed without developing into the super reach reach effect after the development suggestion effect is executed, while the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2) is displayed. , PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the reach effect of the super reach is executed after the execution of the development suggestion effect.

In this feature unit 006SG, the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are displayed in a variable manner. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the invention is not limited to this. A fluctuation pattern that does not execute the development suggestion effect may be provided. In addition, when the development suggestion effect is executed, the ratio of developing to the reach effect of the super reach may be set higher than the case where the development suggestion effect is not executed.

FIG. 12-11 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG. In this feature unit 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-11, when the variable display result is a big hit, the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. It is determined from (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), and PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot).

Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

In the present feature unit 006SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the same big hit variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. A plurality of jackpot variation pattern determination tables having different determination ratios of any one of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 are provided, and different jackpot variation pattern determination tables are provided according to the jackpot type. May be used to determine the variation pattern. By doing so, it is possible to create a variation pattern that is easily determined for each jackpot type, so that the player can pay attention to which variation pattern variable display results in a jackpot. You can improve your hobby.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α deviation variation pattern), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the deviation is obtained. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is obtained. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. Determined from (non-reach off-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach off-off fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α off-off fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β off-off fluctuation pattern) do.

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

That is, when the variable display result is "missing" in the feature unit 006SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on this, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used as pending data. , The storage number is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on this, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used as pending data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order in which the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Numerical data indicating random numbers, for example, random numbers MR2 to MR4, which are not generated by the random number circuit 104, are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 12-1 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area shown in FIG. 12-15 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

In the effect control flag setting unit, there are a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 006SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The command buffer received at the time of starting winning corresponds to the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display is provided. Further, in the start winning command buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage is stored. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) and the hold storage number notification command ( The first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer are associated with these start opening winning designation commands and the hold storage number notification commands. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure holding storage and the second special figure holding storage separately is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is set to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the process is finished.

FIG. 12-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 12-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step 006SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 006SGS142, the second special figure holding storage number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage count value and the total holding storage count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "2" (step 006SGS144), the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 006SGS145). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. As described above, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the second special figure holding storage number is "0", and the first special figure holding storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the first special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 006SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the first special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted up one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "1" (step 006SGS148), the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 12-8 is used as a table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select a table and set it. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 006SGS150a). In this step 006SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 1000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". judge.

As described above, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. , In the process of step 006SGS150a, the special figure display result using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to set "big hit", when the gaming state is in the high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low probability state.

When it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 006SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-9 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 006SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155), the determined jackpot type can be selected. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability change B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability change C" corresponding to probability change jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

After the end of step 006SGS155, or when it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 006SGS150a; N), whether or not to control the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of () and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 006SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 006SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is an effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been sent to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 12-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 006SGS164).

In the determination in step 006SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 006SGS161; N), the gaming state is probablely changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in the state or the time saving state (step 006SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS168; Y), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS168; Y). Step 006SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 006SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the hold storage number counter of the fluctuation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit. The reserved storage number of the variable special map is specified by reading the above, and it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special map is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 006SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 006SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 006SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 006SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is displayed. Based on this, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns can be selected by referring to any of the selected (set) jackpot variation pattern determination table, special hit variation pattern determination table, and loss variation pattern determination tables A to D. (Step 006SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the variable display mode is determined by the process of step 006SGS175 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 006SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is "missing".

After the fluctuation pattern is determined in step 006SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special map games using the second special symbol (step 006SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is made.

Following the process of step 006SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands used at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol are set (step 006SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially send the result specification command and the first hold storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit uses the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the second hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 006SGS177, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the finalized special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 006SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 The specified command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is transmitted first, the first variable display start command, the second variable display start command, and the variation pattern It may be transmitted in the order of a designated command, a game state designation command, a first hold storage number notification command, a second hold storage number notification command, or the like.

FIG. 12-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S112 to the ON state, terminates the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 006SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). When the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step 006SGS184) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. , Hit start 1 designated command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designated command (probable variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designated command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the type of jackpot stored on the effect control board 12. Hit start 4 Make settings for transmitting the designated command (non-probability change) (step 006SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probability change big hit A, 5 times in the case of probability change big hit B, and 2 times in the case of probability change big hit C) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter. (Step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 006SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". If the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 006SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 006SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196, and the value of the time reduction counter is reached. When is "0" (step 006SGS193; Y), after clearing the time saving flag and turning it off (step 006SGS194) in order to end the time saving control, the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is supported. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low accuracy low base state) (step 006SGS195), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 12-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 006SGS201). When the big hit end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) for displaying the big hit end on the image display device 5 on the big hit end display timer. Is set (step 006SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), and the time saving count counter is set to "0". After setting (step 006SGS209), the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), by executing step 006SGS211 and step 006SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time saving number counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state specification command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability change flag and the time reduction flag turned on (step 006SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is special. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 006SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control CPU 120 will be described. FIG. 12-16 is a part of the flowchart of the effect control process process shown in FIG. The effect control CPU 120 has a background image change process (step 006SG162) for changing the background image displayed on the image display device 5 after the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) described above is executed in the effect control process process. ) Is executed, and any of the processes of steps S170 to S175 is executed.

As the background image change processing, for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image at the start timing of variable display (the timing when the effect control process process is executed while the value of the effect control process flag is set to 1). The change of the background image displayed on the device 5 may be determined at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 20%), and the image display device 5 may start displaying a new background image according to the determination. That is, in the feature unit 006SG, the variable display of the decorative pattern and the effect corresponding to the variable display are executed in the state where any one of the plurality of background images is displayed on the image display device 5. There is.

When the game state changes in the background image change process (for example, from the normal state to the big hit game state, from the big hit game state to the probable change state or the time saving state, from the probable change state or the time saving state to the big hit state or the normal state). When the state is changed), the background image corresponding to the game state of the change destination may be displayed on the image display device 5.

FIG. 12-17 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the effect processing during variable display of the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 is a process timer according to the process table selected by the effect control CPU 120 according to the variation pattern in the variable display start setting process, and the effect control CPU 120 is in the variable display start setting process. The respective values of the set variable display time timer and variable display control timer are set to -1 (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table to the process timer (step 006SGS908). In addition, the control status for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the contents of the process data set next (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). (Step 006SGS909). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) is according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS921). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS921; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display control unit 123 on the next display screen of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right (display switching of the previous decorative symbol). The image data (the screen to be displayed after 30 ms has elapsed from the time point) is created (step 006SGS922). Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is a variable display of a fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach variable pattern (step 066SGS923; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927, and if the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927. Further, it is determined whether or not the display image processing flag described later is on (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS924; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS926, and if the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS924; N), the content of the process data being executed is confirmed. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the super reach into the reach effect (step 006SGS925). If it is not the development suggestion start timing for the reach production of the super reach (step 006SGS925; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927, and if it is the development suggestion start timing for the super reach reach production (step 006SGS925; Y), the step 006SGS926 is performed. move on.

As step 006SGS926, the effect control CPU 120 executes a display image processing process for processing (displacement) a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and proceeds to step 006SGS927.

In step 006SGS927, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to perform a process of synthesizing (superimposing) the images created in the above-mentioned steps 006SGS922 and step 006SGS921 on the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on an image obtained by superimposing an image such as a set background image and an image based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the image display device 5 displays a background image, a character image, a decorative pattern, and the like in the variation of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 12-19, the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 006SG is positioned in advance so as to be displayed in a part of the background image and the display area. Is the adjusted first interface image 006SG005I, the second interface image 006SG005J, and a decorative pattern. In particular, the background image in the feature unit 006SG is drawn as an image that is longer in the left-right width direction and the vertical width direction than the display area of the image display device 5, and the background is in the display area of the image display device 5. The central part of the image in the horizontal width direction is displayed. That is, in the feature unit 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area for drawing and arranging the background image are vertically and horizontally wider than the display area of the image display device 5. It is an area for drawing and arranging an image having a long dimension, and in the display area of the image display device 5, only a portion of the image corresponding to the display area is displayed.

In this feature unit 006SG, an image whose vertical width dimension and horizontal width dimension are longer than the display area of the image display device 5 is drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area. The present invention is not limited to this, and the layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creation area are vertically wider than the display area of the image display device 5. While the area for drawing and arranging an image having long dimensions and left-right width dimensions is used, the display image creation area is an image having the same vertical width dimension and left-right width dimension as the display area of the image display device 5. May be used as an image for drawing and arranging. In this case, of the images (background images) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area or the displacement image creation area, only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5 is arranged in the display image creation area to create an image. The background image may be displayed in the display area of the display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 006SGS930; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is per special figure. The value is updated according to the wait process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

FIG. 12-18 is a flowchart showing the display image processing process (step 006SGS926) during the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 12-17. In the display image processing process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS941). When the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 006SGS942). When the variable display during execution is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 006SGS942; Y), the displacement image data for successful development to the super reach effect (for notification of execution of the super reach effect) is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

The image data for displacement in the feature unit 006SG includes an image to be displaced (in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an image in which an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed). This is data in which displacement images for application to (images arranged in the displacement image creation area) are arranged in order in chronological order.

Further, when the variable display during execution is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach (step 006SGS942; N), the effect control CPU 120 is for failure to develop into a super reach effect (for non-execution notification of the super reach effect). As the displacement image data, it is determined at a predetermined ratio whether to select the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A or the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B (step 006SGS944). For example, the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A may be determined at a rate of 50%, and the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B may be determined at a rate of 50%.

In this feature unit 006SG, there are two types of image data for displacement for failure of development to super reach effect: displacement image data of A for failure of development of super reach effect and displacement image data of B for failure of development of super reach effect. Although the embodiment in which the displacement image data can be selected is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement image data that can be selected as the displacement image data for failure to develop into a super reach effect is 3. It may be one or more.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). When the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948. (Step 006SGS946), when the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B is determined (step 006SGS945; N), the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B is selected and the step 006SGS948 is selected. Proceed to (step 006SGS947).

In step 006SGS948, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, the first displacement image is selected from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS951.

When the display image processing flag is on in step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the effect control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step). 006SGS950).

In step 006SGS951, the effect control CPU 120 executes the displacement image drawing process. In the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 12-5 in the displacement image creation area. A displacement target image may be created by compositing (superimposing), and a process of creating a displacement image may be executed by applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether or not the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image is determined by, for example, whether or not the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data. do it.

When the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off to end the display image processing process (step 006SGS953), and the displacement image drawing process is performed. If the displacement image created in is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing process is terminated without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display of the decorative pattern in the feature unit 006SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-20 to 12-23. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-20 (A) and 12-20 (B), in the feature unit 006SG, the display mode of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the gaming state. .. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-20 (A), when the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state), the character image and the numerical image are combined as a decorative pattern for the normal state. A decorative pattern is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-20 (B), when the gaming state is the time saving state (low accuracy low base state or high accuracy high base state), the decoration for the time saving state of only the numerical image is used as the decorative pattern. The design is displayed.

Then, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, first, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 (A) and 12-21 (B), the left and right decorative patterns stop swinging due to the combination of reach. After that, as the decorative pattern inside, the decorative pattern with a numerical value different from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, the development suggestion effect is executed. As a development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (C), among the display areas displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol. , The middle area 006SG005C including the decorative symbol in the middle, and the right area 006SG005R including the decorative symbol on the right. Then, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 (C) to 12-21 (E), the images displayed in the middle region 006SG005C (decorative patterns and background images included in the middle region 006SG005C) are gradually displayed. A development notification symbol (indicated as "development!" Shown in FIGS. 12-21 (C) to 12-21 (E)) that informs the development of a super reach reach effect from above by sliding downward. The symbol) is moved and displayed toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

The development notification symbol in the feature unit 006SG is a symbol that is displayed only when the development suggestion effect is executed, and is not displayed during the execution period of other effects during the variable display.

In addition, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (decorative pattern and background image on the left) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R according to the downward slide movement of the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the left decorative pattern and the background image). The decorative pattern on the right and the background image) slide upward.

The slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in FIG. 12-21 (C) and the second step shown in FIG. 12-21 (D). Eyes, the third stage shown in FIG. 12-21 (E), and the number increases as the stage progresses.

Then, when the third stage slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is completed, the center part of the display area of the image display device 5 (the central part of the middle area 006SG005C) is reached. Development notification The movement of the symbol is completed, and the development of the super reach to reach production is notified.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, first, as shown in FIGS. 12-22 (A) and 12-22 (B), the left and right decorative patterns stop swinging by the combination of reach. After that, as the decorative pattern inside, the decorative pattern with a numerical value different from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, the development suggestion effect is executed. As a development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 12-22 (C), the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I among the display areas displayed on the image display device 5 is the left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol. , The middle area 006SG005C including the decorative symbol in the middle, and the right area 006SG005R including the decorative symbol on the right. Then, as shown in FIGS. 12-22 (C) to 12-22 (E), the image displayed in the middle region 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and the background image in the middle region 006SG005C) is gradually displayed. A development notification symbol for notifying the development of a super reach reach effect from above by sliding downward is displayed by moving toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (decorative pattern and background image on the left) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R according to the downward slide movement of the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the left decorative pattern and the background image). The decorative pattern on the right and the background image) slide upward.

The slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in FIG. 12-22 (C) and the second step shown in FIG. 12-22 (D). It increases with the eyes and stages.

However, in the variable display of the normal reach, after the first-step slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is executed, or the second-step slide movement is performed. After the execution, as shown in FIG. 12-22 (E), the development suggestion effect is completed without the third stage slide movement being executed, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 is shown in FIG. The state returns to the state shown in -22 (B), and the decorative symbol and the small symbol are stopped at the combination indicating the detachment.

As shown in FIGS. 12-21 (C) to 12-21 (E), the slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R in the feature unit 006SG. Illustrates a mode in which the number of images increases as the stage progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and slides of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R. The amount of movement may decrease as the stage progresses, or the amount of movement may increase or decrease only in any of the first to third stages.

Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, as a development suggestion effect, each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is illustrated as a form in which each image can be moved and displayed in up to three stages. The number of steps for sliding and moving each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R as a development suggestion effect may be two or less or four or more.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 (C) to 12-21 (E), in the feature unit 006SG, the slide direction of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R is displayed in the middle area 006SG005C. The present invention is not limited to this, and the slide direction of the images displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R is the middle region 006SG005C. It may be in the same direction as the image displayed in.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced for the development suggestion effect when the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state). The image displayed on the image display device 5 may be displaced for the development suggestion effect when the gaming state is a time saving state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state). ..

As a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-23 (A) to 12-23 (E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first reserved storage display area. The first interface image 006SG005I including the 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including the small symbol are drawn, and the decorative symbol including the development notification symbol described above is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the layer is formed. 3 A background image is drawn in the image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. A displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to be displayed on the image display device 5. Images are being created.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 and 12-22, the first interface image 006SG005I and the first interface image 006SG005I are used in both the case of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach and the case of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. Since the second interface image 006SG005J is an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, it is not subject to displacement. Therefore, the decorative pattern moves toward the upper side or the lower side of the display area of the image display device 5 as a development suggestion effect, so that the visibility from the player is lowered, while the first interface image 006SG005I is the image display device 5. Since the display of the second interface image 006SG005J at the lower part of the display area is maintained at the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J is deteriorated. There is no.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 and 12-22, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage. While the data for the displacement image of is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the displacement for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage. Image data is used. Here, as described above, the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is set to have a higher ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state than the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach. The ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the suggestion effect.

Further, in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG, the left area 006SG005L contains the left decorative pattern, the middle area 006SG005C contains the middle decorative pattern, and the right area 006SG005R contains the right decorative pattern. Since the decorative design of No. slides and moves without being divided, including the character and the number, it is prevented that the development suggestion production is less interesting due to the division of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns. ing.

The feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward or downward, respectively, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , Only one or two of the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R may be moved upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 006SG, the image data for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image and the displacement image data for shifting the display position of the decorative pattern and the background image are obtained. Specific effects that displace the display position of these decorative patterns and background images just by using them (development suggestion effect in feature unit 006SG, reach suggestion effect in variant 006SG-1, revival effect in variant 006SG-2, variant 006SG- Since it is possible to execute the look-ahead notice effect in 3, the promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6), these specific effects are executed using dedicated data. The amount of data to be stored in the CGROM 205 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the data is stored in the CGROM 205.

In particular, since the feature unit 006SG can display a plurality of images as background images on the image display device 5, originally, a specific effect is produced depending on the case where each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. The pattern must be stored in the CGROM 205 in advance, but in the feature unit 006SG, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced only by using the data of the displacement image, so that the pattern is stored in the CGROM 205. The amount of data can be suppressed. In the feature unit 006SG, as game-related information, the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D capable of specifying the first special figure reserved storage number and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U capable of specifying the second special figure reserved storage number. , And a mode in which a small symbol having a display area smaller than that of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state is shortened as the game-related information. A fourth that can identify that a launch promotion display or a variable display that urges the player to launch (launch) the game ball toward the big winning opening or the gate 41 by being in a state or a probable change state is being executed. A design or the like may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority, that is, the feature unit 006SG. Since it is a non-target image of the image displacement in the development suggestion effect in, the display position does not shift together with the image of the left region 006SG005L, the image of the right region 006SG005R, and the image of the middle region 006SG005C, which is the target of the displacement, and the development suggestion. It is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in visually recognizing game-related information such as the number of reserved special figures and the variable display of small symbols when the effect is executed.

Further, of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right region 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion effect. Since the display position of the two-interface image 006SG005J itself does not shift, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbol in the second interface image 006SG005J without discomfort. On the other hand, since the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the lower part of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R during the development suggestion production, the player can see the player. The first special figure reserved storage number in the first interface image 006SG005I is accurately displayed without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of each image of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R. It is possible to recognize the hold storage display area 006SG005D and the second hold storage display area 006SG005U that identifiablely displays the number of hold storages in the second special figure.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 and 12-23, the decorative symbol is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative symbol is in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. By moving upward or downward from the portion, the visibility is lowered, so that the effect of the development suggestion effect can be improved. Further, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbols, they do not move from the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5 when the development suggestion effect is executed, so that the visibility does not deteriorate. The player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the small symbol even during the execution of the development suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-21, in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R gradually increases. While improving the effect of the development suggestion effect, the amount of movement of the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R at each stage can be emphasized, so that the effect is further improved. can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 and 12-22, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid to move to the third stage. While the data for the displacement image is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the displacement image for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage. Because the data for development is used, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the image data for displacement used in the development suggestion effect, so that the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R in the development suggestion effect It is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of moving stages of the image, and it is possible to improve the production interest of the development suggestion production.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 and 12-22, when the image for the displacement image in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are slid to the third stage is used, and the left region 006SG005L, the middle. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R slide to the first stage, the parts where the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide and move to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the second stage. When using the slide-moving displacement image data, the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R have the same part where the images slide and move up to the second stage, so the left region 006SG005L is used as a development suggestion effect. Since the player can pay attention to the process such as the number of stages in which the images of the middle area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R slide and move, the effect of the development suggestion can be further improved.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Will be.

For example, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of super reach into a reach effect as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 12-24 and 12-25 as the modified example 006SG-1, it is suggested that the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reach during the variable display. The reach suggestion effect may be feasible.

The production mode of the reach suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-24 and 12-25. First, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach, as shown in FIGS. 12-24 (A) to 12-24 (C), the left decoration is at the timing immediately before the stop of the left decoration symbol. The action image of the character or the like acts on the symbol, and the decorative symbol on the left stops. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the left is distorted and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 12-24 (D) to 12-24 (F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol at the timing immediately before the stop of the right decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol acts on the right. The decorative pattern stops and reaches. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the right is distorted and displayed.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the non-reach fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 12-25 (A) to 12-25 (C), the left decorative symbol is at the timing immediately before the stop of the left decorative symbol. The action image of the character or the like acts on the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the left is distorted and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 12-25 (D) to 12-25 (F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol at the timing immediately before the stop of the right decorative symbol, but the right The number of symbols that do not match the reach as decorative symbols of is stopped. At this time, the decorative pattern on the right stops and reaches. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the right is displayed without distortion.

As a reach suggestion effect in the present modification 006SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 12-26 (A) to 12-26 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage. A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, an action image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image drawing area is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn on. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-1, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. A displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In the present modification 006SG-1, a mode in which a reach suggestion effect can be executed in a variable display of fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The reach suggestion effect may not be executed in a part of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, as a reach suggestion effect, a form in which an action image such as a character acts on the left and right decorative patterns is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. As the reach suggestion effect in the variable display of the variation pattern of the reach, the case where the action image acts on the decorative symbol only once (only acts on the decorative symbol on the left) may be provided.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, a form in which an action image such as a character acts on a decorative pattern is exemplified as a reach suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reach suggestion effects are provided. The action image of the above may be displayed, and the reach ratio may be different depending on which action image acts on the decorative pattern.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, in the case where the reach is not achieved even though the action image of the character or the like acts as the reach suggestion effect, the acted decorative pattern or the background image in which the display area overlaps with the decorative symbol is displayed. Although a form in which a part is not distorted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the action image is always applied regardless of whether or not it becomes reach. It is also possible to distort a part of the background image in which the decorative pattern on which the above acts and the decorative pattern and the display area overlap.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern on which the action image acts and a part of the background image in which the decorative pattern and the display area overlap are distorted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative symbol on which the action image acts overlaps with the decorative symbol and the display area. Only one of the parts of the background image may be distorted.

Further, in the feature unit 213SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 as a modified example 006SG-2, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of detachment is displayed. It may be possible to execute a revival effect that changes into a combination of big hits.

The production mode of the revival effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28. First, when the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 12-27 (A), after it is suggested that the variable display result is out of order as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern reaches. It is oscillated by the combination of off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-27 (B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is overlapped and displayed on the decorative symbol inside, and a plurality of decorative symbols inside are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. It is divided and displayed in pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-27 (C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are enlarged and displayed as the second stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 12-27 (B), and each fragment is displayed as an image. It moves so as to diffuse from the central portion of the device 5 in different directions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-27 (D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed as the third stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 12-27 (C), and each fragment is further displayed. Move to spread.

Then, as a crack in the fourth stage, an image is finally displayed in which fragments of the decorative design inside are scattered so as to diffuse, and then a new decorative design indicating that the decorative design inside is a big hit is displayed. The variable display stops.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (A), after it is suggested that the variable display result is out of order as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern is displayed. It is oscillated by the combination of reach off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is overlapped and displayed on the decorative symbol inside, and a plurality of decorative symbols inside are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. It is divided and displayed in pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are enlarged and displayed as the second stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 12-28 (B), and each fragment is displayed as an image. It moves so as to diffuse from the central portion of the device 5 in different directions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed as the third stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 12-28 (C), and each fragment is further displayed. Move to spread.

However, in the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment, after the first stage crack is executed, after the second stage crack is executed, or after the third stage crack is executed, The revival effect is completed without executing the crack in the fourth stage, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIGS. 12-28 (A), and the decorative symbol and the small symbol are removed. Stop at the combination shown.

As a revival effect in the present modification 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 12-29 (A) to 12-29 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage display. The first interface image 006SG005I including the area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and the crack effect image 006SG005H is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-2, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement image is applied to the displacement target image to obtain the displacement image (middle). An image in which the decorative pattern of is divided into a plurality of fragments and each fragment is displayed so as to be diffused) is created.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the layer 4 A display image to be displayed by the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

In particular, in the present modification 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside is gradually expanded as the revival effect, that is, in the revival effect, the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5 Is gradually increased, so that the player can be more effectively focused on the revival effect by gradually expanding the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern.

In the present modification 006SG-2, a form in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is duplicated and displayed on the decorative pattern inside is illustrated as a revival effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect image is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes of 006SG005H may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit may be different depending on which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, blue and red are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, and when the variable display result is a big hit, blue cracks are performed at a rate of 20% when the revival effect is executed. The effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the revival effect is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the revival effect is executed, and the red crack effect is displayed at a rate of 20% when the revival effect is executed. The image 006SG005H may be displayed.

In the present modification 006SG-2, two colors, red and blue, are provided as the display color of the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the crack effect image 006SG005H is not limited to this. Three or more colors may be provided.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-2, a mode in which the revival effect is executed when the gaming state is a time saving state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. The revival effect may be executed when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

Further, in the present modification 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 12-28, the decorative pattern inside is composed of a plurality of fragments in the resurrection effect, and the number of these fragments is maintained according to the progress of the resurrection effect. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design in these is not limited to the embodiment in which these fragments are moved stepwise from the central portion to the peripheral portion of the display area of the image display device 5. The plurality of constituent fragments may be gradually increased according to the progress of the resurrection effect. By doing so, it is possible to strongly impress the player with the revival effect by the visual effect that the number of fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside increases as the revival effect progresses.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIG. 12-31 as a modification 006SG-3, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, variable display is executed in the hold storage with a fluctuation pattern of super reach. It is also possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect that suggests that the variable display in which the variable display result is a big hit is executed from the variable display multiple times before.

The production mode of the look-ahead notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (A) and 12-31 (B) in a state where a plurality of reserved memories exist, the variable display during execution is stopped by a combination of the decorative symbols. Then, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (C) and 12-31 (D), when the next variable display is started, a cutting effect crossing the display area left and right in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. The image 006SG005S is displayed in duplicate with respect to the decorative pattern and the background image. Then, of the display area displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the lower lower area 006SG005B including a part of the decorative pattern and the background image with the cutting effect image 006SG005S as a boundary and the rest. It is divided into an upper upper area 006SG005T including a decorative pattern and a background image. That is, the boundary portion between the lower region 006SG005B and the upper upper region 006SG005T is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (D) to 12-31 (E), the lower region 006SG005B is on the left side along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and the upper region 006SG005T is on the right side along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. Slide and move toward at the same time. Then, the lower region 006SG005B that slides to the left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S slides downward, and the upper region 006SG005T that slides to the right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S slides upward. .. At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is moved and displayed so as to follow both the boundary portion on the lower region 006SG005B side and the boundary portion on the upper region 006SG005T side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (E) and 12-31 (F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the lower area 006SG005B is slid downward and the upper area 006SG005T is slid upward. Starts displaying a black image. The display area of the black image expands according to the progress of the downward slide movement of the lower region 006SG005B and the upward slide movement of the upper region 006SG005T, and the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T move out of the display area. By completing the movement, only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed in the display area, which is a so-called blackout state.

After that, when the blackout ends, the display of a new background image and decorative pattern is started in the display area of the image display device 5. The pre-reading notice effect is repeatedly executed until the start of the variable display of the external pre-reading target.

As a look-ahead notice effect in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 12-32 (A) to 12-32 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage. A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, and a cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the drawing area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-3, there is a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing an image further below. Have been placed. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image including the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T is created.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the layer 5 A display image to be displayed by the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

As described above, in the present modification 006SG-3, in the look-ahead notice effect as the specific effect in the present invention, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (C) and 12-31 (D), the upper region 006SG005T and the lower part are shown. A decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the area 006SG005B, and the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left side, respectively, at the boundary between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. Since the disconnection effect image 006SG005S is displayed, the player can more effectively recognize the movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B as the look-ahead notice effect to the left and right sides. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern or the background image, so that the upper area 006SG005T and the lower part are drawn. Even if the display position of the area 006SG005B is displaced, the display position of the cut effect image 006SG005S is not displaced. The displacement can be made more conspicuous, and the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (D) and 12-31 (E), after moving the upper region 006SG005T toward the right side and the lower region 006SG005B toward the left side, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region are further moved. By moving the boundary portion with 006SG005B toward the upper side and the lower side, respectively, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further enhanced, and the effect of the effect can be improved. In particular, as a look-ahead notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (D) and 12-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left side, but the upper region 006SG005T. Since the boundary between the upper region 006SG005B and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, the synergistic effect of the displacement (movement) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary portion further enhances the effect of the look-ahead notice effect. Can be done.

In this modification 006SG-3, the moving direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is different from the right side, which is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving direction of the boundary portion between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T and the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. It suffices if it is different from either one.

In this modification 006SG-3, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a look-ahead notice effect, and the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T divided along the cutting effect image 006SG005S are moved and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S are provided, and variable display of the look-ahead target is provided depending on which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. The rate at which the variable display result in is a big hit may be different.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-33, three types of colors, blue, green, and red, are provided as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and when the variable display result of the look-ahead target is a big hit, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is used. It is displayed in blue at a rate of 10%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 60%. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the look-ahead target is out of alignment, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue at a rate of 60%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 10%. Just do it.

By doing so, the player can pay attention to the display color of the disconnection effect image 006SG005S displayed during the look-ahead notice effect, so that the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further enhanced.

In the present modification 006SG-3, a form in which three kinds of colors of blue, green, and red are provided as display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cutting effect is not limited thereto. The display color of the image 006SG005S may be two colors or four or more colors. Further, the rate at which the variable display result of the look-ahead target becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) may be different depending on the shape and size of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, the display number of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and other aspects other than the color. ..

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as a look-ahead notice effect, a mode in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is divided into two regions along the cutting effect image 006SG005S has been exemplified. The pre-reading notice effect is not limited, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas. In this case, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect may be improved by changing the slide movement direction of each area.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as a look-ahead notice effect, a mode in which the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved respectively is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead notice effect is not limited thereto. The region to be moved may be only one of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed over the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the left side. It is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to. Therefore, even if the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B are different from each other, so that the pre-reading notice effect is produced. It can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being deteriorated.

In the present modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side are different. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed in the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side. At least a part of the image may be common. By doing so, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the pre-reading notice effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (C) and 12-31 (D), the upper area in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. The image displayed over the 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same as the image displayed over the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed over the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. It is not necessary that a part of the image is displayed as an image displayed over the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the production of the look-ahead notice production.

In this modification 006SG-3, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead notice effect (in FIG. 12-31 (D), the upper region 006SG005T is moved to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B is moved. The amount of movement (displacement) between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same when the upper region 006SG005T is moved upward and the lower region 006SG005B is moved downward in FIG. 12-31 (E). Is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of movement (displacement amount) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B when the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead notice effect. ) May be different. In this way, by making the amount of movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, which move in the opposite directions as the look-ahead notice effect different, different, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further improved.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 12-33, a mode in which the ratio of the variable display result of the look-ahead target to be a big hit is different depending on the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S has been exemplified. Is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 12-34 as a modification 006SG-4, the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be changed for each variable display execution. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the look-ahead target becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) may be different depending on the display color of the final cutting effect image 006SG005S and the change pattern of the display color.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIG. 12-35 as a modification example 006SG-5, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a non-probability change jackpot or a two-round probability change with a small number of rounds is performed during the variable display. A combination of decorative symbols that are displayed in a combination that indicates the type of jackpot, such as a jackpot, and then the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed in the same state as the combination that indicates the jackpot, and finally stopped. You may execute a promotion effect (also called a re-lottery effect) to notify the jackpot type.

The production mode of the promotion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-35. First, after notifying that the variable display result is a big hit as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, as shown in FIG. 12-35 (A), after the end of these reach effects, the decorative design is changed to a non-probable big hit or a two-round probability change. It is displayed as a combination indicating a jackpot type that is relatively less advantageous to the player such as a jackpot (in the example shown in FIG. 12-35 (A), a combination of even "2" indicating a non-probability variable jackpot).

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-35 (B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are used as a promotion effect, such as a 2-round probability variation jackpot, a 5-round probability variation jackpot, and a 10-round probability variation jackpot. Variable display at a constant speed will be performed in a state that includes combinations of decorative patterns of other jackpot types.

During the execution of the promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 12-35 (C) and 12-35 (D), the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 faces to the left in two steps. And distort.

Then, the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot type (see FIG. 12-35 (A)) indicated by the combination of the decorative symbols displayed first. In some cases, after the distortion of the first or second stage of the promotion effect, the decorative symbol stops at the combination of the jackpot type (the combination of the probabilistic jackpot in the example shown in FIGS. 12-35 (E)). On the other hand, if the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the combination of the decorative symbols displayed first, the decorative symbol is the decorative symbol after the first stage distortion of the promotion effect. It stops at the combination of big hit types (the combination of non-probable variable big hits in the example shown in FIG. 12-35 (F)).

In this modification 006SG-5, the "advantage for the player" between the jackpot types is controlled to whether or not the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game ends, and to the time saving state after the jackpot game ends. Refers to those with different variable display times and those with different numbers of rounds in big hit games.

As a promotion effect in the present modification 006SG-5, as shown in FIGS. 12-36 (A) to 12-36 (E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage display. A first interface image 006SG005I including an area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. The background image is drawn.

Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image is created in which the central portion in the vertical direction is distorted toward the left side.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image is created.

The display image displayed on the image display device 5 in this modification 006SG-5 is an image that is longer than the display area of the image display device 5 in the horizontal width direction and the vertical width direction like the feature unit 006SG. (See FIG. 12-19), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 12-37, the dimensions of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 in the left-right width direction are images. It may be the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the display device 5.

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in FIGS. 12-38 (A) to 12-38 (C), the promotion effect is in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5. When the central portion is distorted toward the left side, an image non-display portion in which no image is displayed is formed in the right portion of the display area.

Therefore, when the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12-37, FIG. As shown in −39 (A) to FIG. 12-39 (D), when the promotion effect is executed, the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are drawn. By enlarging the arranged background image or enlarging the displacement target image (background image and decorative pattern) created in the displacement image creation area, a part of the background image is moved out of the display area of the image display device 5. Deploy. By doing so, by applying the displacement image to the image to be displaced, even if the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect, the right portion of the image display device 5 Since the background image arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed due to the enlargement, the image display device 5 is inappropriate because the above-mentioned image non-display portion is formed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the display will be displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 12-39, when the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect, no image is displayed on the right portion of the display area. Although an example is shown in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged in order to prevent the formation of the image, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image non-display portion is formed. In order to prevent this, only the background image may be enlarged.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the displacement image is applied to the entire displacement target image enlarged so that the left-right width dimension is longer than the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of creating an image for promotion effect by applying it, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range to which the displacement image is applied among the displacement target images is the display of the image display device 5. It is not necessary to displace only the part corresponding to the area, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, promotion effect is executed when the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the image display device 5. By enlarging the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, the image non-display portion is formed during the promotion effect. The embodiment is illustrated to prevent the image from being drawn, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are drawn / arranged. The enlargement of the background image may be performed stepwise according to the progress of the promotion effect (according to the increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). By doing so, the decorative pattern and the background image are suddenly enlarged and displayed on the image display device 5, so that a sense of discomfort can be reduced. Therefore, the display area of the image display device 5 can be displayed while maintaining the effect of the promotion effect. In the process of increasing the distortion of the displayed image, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display such as the image non-display portion being displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the reach effect of the super reach can be executed during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display is in progress. In, it is possible to execute a pseudo-ream effect including a temporary stop of a decorative symbol and a revariable display, and the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit expectation) may be different according to the number of executions of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In particular, in the variable display for executing such a pseudo-continuous effect, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped immediately before the temporary stop timing of the decorative symbol, or a temporary stop suggestion effect when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. It may be possible to execute a temporary stop notification effect for notifying the temporary stop of the decorative pattern.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged so that the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of a form in which an image non-display portion is prevented from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect by arranging a part thereof, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion is performed in advance in the CGROM 205. An image having a size larger than the display area of the image display device 5 as an image for effect (at least the left-right width dimension is longer than the left-right width dimension of the display area of the image display device 5 in the case of this modification 006SG-5) is stored. However, by drawing and arranging the image in the displacement image creation area or the display image creation area, it may be possible to prevent the image non-display portion from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged so that the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of a form in which an image non-display portion is prevented from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect by arranging a part thereof, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect is executed. In this case, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 at a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of the present modification 006SG-5, the right outer side of the display area of the image display device 5) in the display image creation area. An image (non-display image) different from the image (display image) may be arranged adjacent to the display image. By doing so, when the promotion effect is executed, the displayed image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other over the display area and the non-display area of the image display device 5, so that the image non-display portion is replaced. Therefore, a part of the non-display image will be displayed.

The feature unit 006SG exemplifies a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of super reach into a reach effect as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 12-40 to 12-42 as a modification 006SG-6, these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects are used as the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5. You may do it.

The production mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-40. First, as shown in FIG. 12-40 (A), when a certain period of time elapses from the start of the variable display, the left and right decorative symbols stop (swing stop) and reach. After that, as a temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol (the symbol displayed as "NEXT"), which is a part of the decorative symbol, moves from the upper side to the lower side. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ripple effect image 006SG005P so as to converge from the peripheral portion of the display area toward the central portion of the display area, and at the same time, the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P ( The left and right decorative patterns and background image) are displayed distorted.

When the variable display is a variable display for executing a pseudo-ream effect (variable display in which the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped), the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and as shown in FIG. 12-40 (B). , The ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporary stop and the pseudo-continuous pattern. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display in which the pseudo-ream effect is not executed (variable display in which the pseudo-ream symbol does not temporarily stop), the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as it is, as shown in FIGS. 12-40 (C). The image display device 5 is moved to the lower part of the display area to be hidden, and a symbol indicating that the variable display result is out of alignment is displayed as a decorative symbol inside.

In the present modification 006SG-6, as shown in FIG. 12-40, a form suggesting that the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped by displaying the ripple effect image 006SG005P on the image display device 5 is provided. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the ripple effect image 006SG005P are provided, and in which display mode the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect. The ratio at which the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped may be different accordingly.

For example, in FIG. 12-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (doublely displayed) as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect, but as shown in FIGS. 12-41, the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect. Is provided, and the rate at which the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped may be different depending on the number of ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect.

In this modification 006SG-6, the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed as a part of the decorative symbol, that is, the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed as a part of the variable display even in a period other than the pseudo-ream effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol different from the decorative symbol and may be a special symbol displayed only during the pseudo-continuous production.

As shown in FIGS. 12-42 (A) and 12-42 (B), the temporary stop notification effect is the ripple effect image 006SG005P after the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect. The image is displayed so as to diffuse from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the peripheral portion of the display area, and the surrounding image (left and right decorative patterns and background image) of the ripple effect image 006SG005P is distorted. Is displayed.

As the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6, as shown in FIGS. 12-43 (A) to 12-43 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area is used. The first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, and the ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. It is drawn, and a decorative symbol including a pseudo-continuous symbol is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-6, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement image (ripple) is applied to the displacement target image. The effect image 006SG005P creates a distorted decorative pattern and a background image).

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

Further, the feature unit 006GS exemplifies a form in which an effect image is displayed using an image display device 5 capable of displaying only a stereoscopic image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 006SG-. As shown in FIGS. 12-44 and 12-45 as FIG. 7, the effect image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying a stereoscopic image.

The modified example 006SG-7 will be described below. In the above-mentioned feature unit 006SG and the modified example, a display device such as an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) capable of displaying a plan view image (2D image) is used as the image display device 5. However, in the present modification 006SG-7, as shown in FIGS. 12-44, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5 that allows the player to visually recognize the stereoscopic image with the naked eye by the paralux barrier method. The feature is that by using ‘’, it is possible to display a stereoscopic image (3D image) in addition to a planar view image (2D image) as various images.

As shown in FIGS. 12-44, the naked-eye liquid crystal image display device 5'of this modification 006SG-7 is a liquid crystal image (video) composed of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image). The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying the image, the backlight 006SG901 that irradiates planar light from the rear to the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and the image liquid crystal panel on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900. It has a structure having a 006SG900 and a liquid crystal panel for a parallax barrier 006SG910 provided at a predetermined interval.

In the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910, the player's left eye visually recognizes the right-eye image (R image) displayed in a vertically long strip shape on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and the player's right eye displays the left-eye image (L image). It has a vertical striped black portion that serves as a shutter for preventing the player from visually recognizing, and a transparent portion that enables the player's right eye to visually recognize the image for the right eye and the player's left eye to visually recognize the image for the left eye. A liquid crystal with relatively high light transparency that enables a parallax barrier image display state for displaying a parallax barrier image and a transmissive state in which all pixels are transparent parts without vertical striped black parts. It is said to be a panel.

The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 displays, for example, a right eye image (R image) instead of the left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 does not display the above-mentioned parallax barrier image ( A plan view image (2D image) can also be displayed by setting the display to full transparency.

That is, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5'which is the display means of the present modification 006SG-7 is composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in addition to the non-stereoscopic image (2D image). It is possible to display a stereoscopic image with the naked eye.

The stereoscopic image composed of the right-eye image and the left-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is also drawn on each of the above-mentioned layers in the same manner as the plan view image (2D image), while the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel. The disparity barrier image displayed on the 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When displaying an effect image using such a naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5', another effect is stereoscopically displayed at a timing different from the specific effect (for example, development suggestion effect) in the present invention during variable display. It may be made feasible by displaying a visual image (3D image).

As shown in FIGS. 12-45 (A) to 12-45 (D), during the variable display, the autostereoscopic image display device 5'moves upward, which is a displacement specific image, as described above. The development suggestion effect, which is a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moved downward are displayed, can be executed, and the execution period of the development suggestion effect is long. As a non-overlapping notice effect, a variable display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit is executed, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display notice effect.

That is, a development suggestion effect is executed, which is a specific effect in which the image of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R moved upward and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moved downward, which are the displacement specific images, are displayed. In this case, only the stereoscopic image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

When the image of the left region 006SG005L and the image of the right region 006SG005R moved upward and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moved downward as described above, which are displacement specific images, are displayed, the display is non-stereoscopic. By making it a planar image (2D image) which is an image, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to the stereoscopic image, and the interest of the production is lowered. Can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the effect of displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image), the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R moved upward, which are the displacement specific images, and the middle region 006SG005C moved downward. Since the execution period is different from the development suggestion effect, which is a specific effect in which the image of is displayed, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) is restricted based on the execution period of the effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a displacement specific image and a stereoscopic image (3D image) are displayed in the same effect, the stereoscopic image (3D) is displayed during the display of the displacement specific image. To prevent the image) from being displayed, data such as a display flag that can specify that the displacement specific image is being displayed is stored, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is based on the data. The display of may be restricted. In addition, regarding these restrictions, a predetermined period before and after the period in which the displacement specific image is displayed so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed immediately after or immediately before the display of the displacement specific image is completed. Even during the period, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag.

In the above-mentioned modification 006SG-7, a parallax barrier type autostereoscopic image display device 5'using a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, a stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed using a lenticular lens method or an integral imaging type autostereoscopic image display device other than the parallax barrier method.

In the present modification 006SG0-7, a form in which the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stereoscopic view is also performed in the development suggestion effect. A case may be provided in which an image (3D image) is displayed. When displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) even in the exhibition suggestion effect, the stereoscopic image (3D image) image (right eye image and left eye image) is drawn, and the planar view image (2D image) is drawn. It may be drawn and arranged in an image drawing area (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area) higher than the image drawing area to be arranged. By doing so, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed with priority over the planar image (2D image), so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is preferably displayed in the development suggestion effect. can do.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-7, as an effect of displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image), a variable display advance notice effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit is different from the development suggestion effect (specific effect). Although the form that can be executed in a period is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the introduction effect of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) is performed in the period before the development suggestion effect (specific effect). A stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) is executed by displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image), so that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) can be performed. The production effect of can be further improved. Furthermore, a plurality of production modes of the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect) are provided, and the practice mode of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) can be set according to which effect mode the introduction effect is executed. It may be different.

Further, in the introduction effect, the movable body 32 is operated, and the operation of the movable body 32 and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) are linked to produce the effect of the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect). May be improved.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. 12-46 as a modified example 006SG-8, the game-related information in the present invention (first interface image 006SG005I or second interface in the feature unit 006SG). (Corresponding to image 006SG005J), the payout display of medals, the display of the number of remaining games of AT (assist time), the medal display stored as credits, etc. are displayed on the image display device 5 together with the effect image, and these game-related information is displayed. It may be a non-target image of displacement.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, as a specific effect of the present invention, an effect of changing or distorting (distorting) the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as a specific effect, changes and distortions in the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be repeatedly executed.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, development suggestion effect, reach suggestion effect, revival effect, look-ahead notice effect, promotion effect, temporary stop suggestion effect, and temporary stop notification effect are exemplified as specific effects in the present invention. As these specific effects, a plurality of effects may be executed. In the case where a plurality of specific effects can be executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, it is possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern (character and number) is not divided, such as a development suggestion effect, in the normal state. On the other hand, it is possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern (only numbers) is divided into a plurality of fragments or display areas, such as a revival effect or a look-ahead notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the specific effect due to the fact that the decorative pattern including the character and the number is not divided in the normal state, and conversely, in the time saving state, the decorative pattern containing only the number is displayed. By dividing, the effect of a specific effect can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a form in which the decorative pattern is composed of characters and numbers in a normal state and the decorative pattern is composed only of numbers in a time-saving state, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The display mode of the decorative symbol may be changed from the middle of the variable display in a specific variable pattern such as the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach. For example, in the variable display of Super Reach, the variable display of the decorative symbol composed of characters and numbers is executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, and the decorative symbol composed of only the numbers is executed in the period after the reach. The variable display of is performed. Further, in the period after the reach, as the specific effect in the present invention, it is sufficient to enable the effect of dividing the decorative pattern such as the revival effect.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, an image in which at least a part of the specific image in the present invention is displaced in the left-right direction or the up-down direction is displayed as a displacement specific image on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which at least a part of a specific image is enlarged or reduced may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a displacement specific image. That is, the displacement direction of the image in the present invention may include the enlargement / reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the left-right direction (X-axis direction) and the up-down direction (Y-axis direction).

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-3 and 12-4, in the displacement target image, the R value and the G value of the displacement target image correspond to the R value and the G value of the displacement image from the position corresponding to the pixel A. An embodiment in which a displacement image is generated in a replacement method in which a pixel X is specified and the pixel X is displaced (replaced) at a position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, for example, in the displacement target image, the displacement image is moved by a method (movement method) in which the pixel X at the position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image is moved to the position corresponding to the R value and the G value of the pixel A. It may be generated. In the replacement method, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the region close to the boundary portion to the displacement image considering the width of the boundary portion of the region having a different movement direction as in the modified example 006SG-3. On the other hand, in the case of the replacement method, since it is not necessary to edit these, the load of creating an image can be reduced, and when an effect image or the like is placed at the boundary, the boundary where the effect image is placed is set. Since the degree of freedom can be increased, the load of creating images including effect images can be reduced.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 32 Mounted movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position,
A movable body that can move from the first position to a second position different from the first position,
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
A pseudo-movable body display effect for moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and
A movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, and
Is feasible and
When the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period, the pseudo-movable body effect is not executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed.
Moreover,
A display means that has a display area capable of displaying an image and can display a display image of game-related information related to the progress of the game in the display area.
A storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information, and a storage means.
An image processing means having a plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers. ,
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area,
Equipped with
The storage means can store display position displacement information for shifting a display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position to a second position different from the first position.
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information.
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect of displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images